JP6736524B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player. There is one configured in. Further, a variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “variation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result, the predetermined game value is obtained. There is one configured to give the player (so-called pachinko machine).

Also, after setting a predetermined number of bets on a predetermined game medium for one game, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each variable. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing, and the variable display of all variable display devices is performed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium predetermined according to the prize is paid out, and when a specific prize is generated, the game state is given a predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (the so-called slot machine).

The prize value is to pay out a prize ball or give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball in the prize area. In addition, the game value is that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes a state advantageous for the player who easily hits the ball when the specific display result is obtained, and That is, the right to generate an advantageous state is generated, and the condition for paying out a prize ball is easily established.

It is known that, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, a strobe light emission effect can be executed, and the longer the light emission period of the strobe, the higher the reliability of the big hit (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2004-147835, A

In the gaming machine as disclosed in Patent Document 1, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by the light emitting effect, but if the light emitting period is simply lengthened according to the reliability of the big hit, the effect of the effect is not good. There was a problem that it was enough.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to propose a game machine capable of enhancing the effect of light emission effect and improving the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention adopts the following means in order to solve the above problems. It should be noted that the reference numerals used in the description of the modes for carrying out the invention and the drawings described later are added for reference, but the constituent elements of the present invention are not limited to those having the reference numerals.

The invention according to means 1 is
It is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) equipped with a light emitting part (LED 9: left frame LED 9b, top frame LED 9a, right frame LED 9c, accessory LED, board surface LED, light guide plate, segment indicator, dot indicator, etc.). hand,
A game state control means capable of controlling an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
And a production control means capable of controlling production,
The effect control means,
A light emitting effect using the light emitting unit,
It is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled,
A first pattern (light emitting pattern table 1211 in FIG. 62: category: LP1 to LP3: light emitting pattern LP1) that causes the light emitting unit to emit light in a specific color (single color: blue, green, red, etc.) when the suggestive effect is executed. -1, LP1-2, LP2-1, LP2-2, LP3-1, LP3-2, etc.) and a second pattern for causing the light emitting unit to emit light in a plurality of colors (blue, green, red→rainbow color, etc.) (Emitting pattern table 1211 in FIG. 62: Category LP4: Emitting patterns LP4-1, LP4-2, etc.) can be used to perform the emitting effect,
When the emission effect by the first pattern has been performed, when the emission of a specific color continues for a predetermined period is controlled by the advantageous condition than when the light emission in a particular color not continued the predetermined period The percentage is high,
The specific color includes a first specific color and a second specific color,
The ratio of the light emission of the second specific color continuing for the predetermined period is higher than the ratio of the light emission of the first specific color continuing for the predetermined period,
When the light emission effect is executed by the second pattern, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the light emission effect is executed by the first pattern,
A period in which the light emission in the plurality of colors continues when the light emission effect is performed in the second pattern is shorter than a period in which the light emission in the specific color continues when the light emission effect is performed in the first pattern. Long (light emission pattern table 1211: light emission effect time, FIG. 61, FIG. 80: higher jackpot reliability, longer light emission effect period, etc.),
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, the first pattern and the second pattern have different expectations for the player and different production periods, so that the production effect of the light emission production can be enhanced and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. ..
The gaming machine according to means 1,
A control unit for controlling an electric component including the light emitting unit;
Output means capable of outputting a specific signal for driving the electric component in response to the input of the control signal by the serial communication method from the control means, and outputting the control signal to another output means; Equipped with
The output means outputs the control signal to the other output means in a first output state in which a waveform rises according to a predetermined mode, and a waveform rises in a change mode gentler than the first output state. The output state may be set to any one of the second output states.

The invention according to means 2 is
It is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) equipped with a light emitting part (LED 9: left frame LED 9b, top frame LED 9a, right frame LED 9c, accessory LED, board surface LED, light guide plate, segment indicator, dot indicator, etc.). hand,
Further provided is a light emission effect means (effect control board 12: effect control CPU 120 etc.) capable of executing a light emission effect using the light emitting unit,
The light emission effect means is capable of executing the light emission effect with a plurality of light emission patterns (light emission pattern table 1211 of FIG. 62: various light emission patterns, etc.) having different light emission modes (light emission colors, etc.).
The plurality of light emission patterns,
All are light-emitting modes including light emission of a specific color (monochrome: blue, green, red, etc.),
The expectation (big hit reliability, etc.) for the player is different, and the light emission unit time for the specific color is different (FIG. 67: monochromatic blue, green, and red are continuously emitting light, whereas the rainbow is Since the colors are repeated in order of blue→green→red, the emission time as a single color is short, the switching unit emission time Δtn is shorter than the continuous unit emission time Δtm, etc.),
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to draw attention to the difference in the period during which the specific color is emitting light, by varying the expectation for the player and the emission unit time for the specific color in a plurality of emission patterns. It becomes possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The invention according to means 3 is
It is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) equipped with a light emitting section (LED 9: left frame LED 9b, top frame LED 9a, right frame LED 9c, accessory LED, board surface LED, light guide plate, segment indicator, dot indicator, etc.). hand,
Further provided is a light emission effect means (effect control board 12: effect control CPU 120 etc.) capable of executing a light emission effect using the light emitting unit,
The light emission effect means emits light from the light emitting unit in a light emission mode in which a specific color (single color: blue, green, red, etc.) is blinked (light emission pattern table 1211 in FIG. 72: categories: LP11 to LP13: Light emission patterns LP11-1, LP12-1, LP13-1) and a second specification for causing the light emitting unit to emit light according to a light emission mode in which any one of a plurality of colors including the specific color is changed to another color. The light emission effect can be executed with a pattern (light emission pattern table 1211: category LP14: light emission pattern LP14-1, etc. in FIG. 72),
The first specific pattern and the second specific pattern have different expectations (big hit reliability, etc.) for the player, and different emission cycles of the specific color (FIG. 74: switching unit emission time Δtn is a blinking unit). Light emission time is shorter than Δto1 to Δto3, etc.),
It is a game machine characterized by that.
According to this, the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern have different expectations for the player and different light emission cycles of the specific color, so that the effect of the light emission effect is enhanced and the game is entertained. Can be improved.

Further, as the invention according to means 4,
The gaming machine described in means 1 (the same applies to means 2 and 3),
In the light emission effecting means, the first pattern and the second pattern have the same timing (the reach state generation timing, etc.) for causing the light emitting unit to start light emission, but the timing for ending the light emission by the light emitting unit ( (E.g., the timing when the light emission effect time has elapsed from the reach state generation timing) (FIG. 61, FIG. 80, etc.),
You may comprise the gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this, the timing of starting the light emission is common, but the timing of ending the light emission can be made different to make the player have an expectation.

Further, as the invention according to means 5,
The gaming machine described in means 1 (the same applies to means 2 and 3),
The light emitting effect means has a first step of causing the light emitting unit to emit light in a first specific color (monochrome: blue, etc.), and a second specific color after the first step (monochrome: green, red, etc.). It is possible to execute the light emission effect by the first pattern including the second step of causing the light emitting unit to emit light, and after the end of the period corresponding to the second step, it is possible to execute the light emission effect by the second pattern. (FIG. 80: single color: blue, etc.→single color: green, red, etc.→rainbow, etc.),
You may comprise the gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this, by performing the light emission effect by the first pattern including two stages of different colors for causing the light emitting unit to emit light, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, by executing the light emission effect according to the second pattern after the end of the period corresponding to the second stage, it is possible to make the player have an expectation.

Further, as the invention according to means 6,
The gaming machine described in means 1 (the same applies to means 2 and 3),
Variable display (special symbol display: first special symbol display, second special symbol display, etc.) variable display means (special symbol display 4: first special symbol display 4A, second special symbol display 4B, etc.) )When,
Specific display means (holding indicator 25 or the like) capable of executing a specific display (holding display, active display, etc.) corresponding to the variable display by the variable display means,
Further equipped with,
The light emission effect means executes the light emission effect in a pattern according to the display mode (color of the hold display, lighting/blinking, etc.) of the specific display by the specific display means (the hold display notice effect determination process of FIG. 78, FIG. 79). Prefetch mode determination table 1219, etc.),
You may comprise the gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this, by performing the light emission effect in a pattern corresponding to the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the variable display, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as the invention according to means 7,
A gaming machine described in any one of means 1, 4 to 6 (same for means 2 and 3),
Variable display (special symbol display: first special symbol display, second special symbol display, etc.) variable display means (special symbol display 4: first special symbol display 4A, second special symbol display 4B, etc.) )When,
Control means (main board 11: game control microcomputer 100, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
Further equipped with,
The light emission effect means executes the light emission effect according to the second pattern when the display result of the variable display means is a display result controlled to an advantageous state by the control means.
You may comprise the gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this, when the display result of the variable display means is a display result controlled to an advantageous state, the player can have a sense of expectation by executing the light emission effect according to the second pattern.

Further, as the invention according to means 8,
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1, 4 to 7 (same for means 2 and 3),
The light emission effect means has a plurality of common patterns (light emission patterns LP11-1, LP12-1, LP13-1, LP14-1 of FIG. 72) having the same color change mode (white blue, white green, white red, etc.). Etc.), it is possible to execute the light emission effect according to the second pattern,
The plurality of common patterns have different expectations (big hit reliability, etc.) for the player and different light emission cycles of the common color (FIG. 76: the higher the big hit reliability, the shorter the switching unit light emission time Δtn, etc.). ,
You may comprise the gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this, in a plurality of common patterns in which the manner of color change is common, the degree of expectation for the player is different, and the light emission cycle of the common color is different, thereby enhancing the effect of light emission effect, It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as the invention according to means 9,
A gaming machine described in any one of means 1, 4 to 8 (same for means 2 and 3),
Further provided is a specific effect execution means (e.g., CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a specific effect (reach effect, etc.) corresponding to notification of whether or not an advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) is advantageous for the player,
The light emission effect means executes light emission effect based on a predetermined operation of the player (button operation: regardless of presence/absence of button operation promotion notification, etc.) during execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means.
You may comprise the gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this, while performing the specific effect corresponding to the notification of the win or loss of the advantageous state advantageous to the player, by executing the light emission effect based on the predetermined operation of the player, the effect effect of the light emission effect is enhanced, It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as the invention according to means 10,
A gaming machine described in any one of means 1, 4 to 9 (same for means 2 and 3),
The light emitting unit (hat, stick-shaped, arch-shaped light emitting member) is configured to have a plurality of light emitting portions,
The light emission effect means can execute the light emission effect by a special pattern that causes the plurality of light emission portions to emit light in different colors (a pattern that changes the colors of the plurality of light emission portions in gradation).
You may comprise the gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this, by performing the light emission effect by the special pattern in which the plurality of light emission parts emit light of different colors, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, embodiments for carrying out the present invention include the inventions of A1 to A19 shown below. The invention according to the above means may further have the configurations A1 to A19.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes electric parts (for example, board-side LEDs 9d and 9e, a top frame LED 9a, a left frame LED 9b, a right frame LED 9c, and a first effect motor 303 for rotating the movable portion 302, The control means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the second effect motor 330 for sliding the movable member 321 and the electric parts are driven according to the control signal from the control means by the serial communication method. Output means (for example, light emitter drivers 411a and 411b, motor drive driver 412, and light emitter drivers 413a to 413c) for outputting a specific signal (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11). ) And the output means outputs a specific signal by a parallel communication method from the specific signal output terminals grouped into a plurality of different groups, and the output timing of the specific signals from the plurality of specific signal output terminals is different for each group. Different (for example, as shown in FIG. 9, the output timings of the output signals from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 are dispersed for each group), and a plurality of layers with priorities set (for example, 42 is provided with a data setting area (for example, a control data area shown in FIG. 42) having layers 1 to 5), and each layer of the data setting area has at least a light-emitting body (for example, LED 9a to among the electric components) among the electric components. 9e) light emission data for controlling light emission (for example, control data for causing the LEDs 9a to 9e to emit light) can be set, and the control means can perform light emission control of the light emitter based on the light emission data. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the control data set in the control data area shown in FIG. 42 to each of the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F), and the plurality of layers are set in the data setting area. When the light emission data is set, the light emission control of the light emitter is performed based on the light emission data set in the layer having a higher priority (for example, the production control CPU 120 sets the control data in a plurality of layers). In this case, the control data set in the layer to which the highest priority value is assigned is output to each of the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F). With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the control accuracy of the electric components while suppressing the radio wave emission to the outside of the gaming machine.

(Means A2) In the means A1, the light emitting means including the plurality of light emitting elements is controlled to emit light based on a specific signal output from a specific signal output terminal of the same group of the output means (for example, a modification shown in FIG. 17). 5, the signals input to the same full-color LED are connected to the drive output terminals belonging to the same group). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress radio wave emission to the outside of the gaming machine and suppress deviation in the light emission timing of the light emitting means including the plurality of light emitting elements.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means to a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, a normal slew rate). Output state (see FIG. 7(1)) and a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that changes more gradually than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 7(2))). ) Can be set to any output state (for example, setting the S terminal to L (low) sets the output to the normal slew rate, and setting the S terminal to H (high) sets low through). The output may be set to the rate (see FIG. 6)). With such a configuration, the setting can be changed according to the usage environment, and the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased according to the setting.

(Means A4) The means A3 includes a plurality of output means (for example, the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b, the motor drive driver 412, and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c), and the plurality of output means outputs the input control signal. The output state setting at this time is common (for example, as in the modified example 3 shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, for all serial-parallel conversion circuits, the through output is set to the normal slew rate output. Alternatively, for example, the through output is set to an output of a low slew rate for all the serial-parallel conversion circuits as in Modification 4 shown in FIG. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce design mistakes while considering noise resistance.

(Means A5) In any one of the means A1 to A4, the output means has a stop function (e.g., timeout) that stops the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed from the input of the control signal. Function (for example, by setting the T terminal to H (high), the timeout function is set to the valid state. See FIG. 6). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an operation defect due to a wiring defect and the like, and it is possible to stably control the electric component.

(Means A6) In the means 5, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect control process process (see step S55) to perform at least a predetermined period (in this example, By repeatedly outputting a control signal every 1 second), the lighting control of the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c is continuously executed, and the first effect motor 303 and 2) The drive control of the effect motor 330 is controlled so as to be continuously executed). With such a configuration, control corresponding to the stop function of the output unit can be realized.

(Means A7) In the means A5 or A6, the output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (for example, by setting the T terminal to L (low), the timeout function is set to the invalid state, The time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high) (see FIG. 6). With such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce the cost by sharing the parts.

(Means A8) In any one of the means A1 to A7, a first motion (a standing motion that is a movement from the tilt position to the standing position) and a second motion (a tilt motion that is a movement from the standing position to the tilt position). ) Capable movable body (movable member 321), and effect (production control CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing an effect (effect symbol changing process (S75), big hit game in-process (S78), etc.), The effect execution means executes the first effect of the special effect in accordance with the first motion of the movable body. The first pattern (the flame effect effect is executed during the first movable object operation effect, and the second movable object operation effect is not executed. Effect pattern A1, an effect pattern A2) in which a flame effect effect is executed during the first movable body operation effect, and a flame effect effect is also executed in the second movable object operation effect, and a first operation in accordance with the first operation of the movable object. After performing the special effect of the aspect, the second pattern for performing the special effect of the second aspect different from the first aspect with the first operation after the second operation of the movable body (at the time of the first movable body operation effect) The effect may be executed by the effect pattern A3) in which the flame effect effect is executed and the lightning effect effect is executed in the second movable body operation effect. According to such a configuration, by changing the mode of the special effect associated with the first motion of the movable body, it is possible to diversify the effect and improve the interest of the effect when the movable body operates. it can.

(Means A9) In any one of the means A1 to A8, whether or not the special effect is executed during the execution of the specific effect (the fifth round, and is controlled to be in the probable state after the jackpot gaming state is finished) (Challenge effect informed by the effect mode) is an effect (an effect in which the effect display device 5 displays an image in which the flame effect image 1010 or the lightning effect image 1020 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001) executed before timing. , The ratio of performing the predetermined notification in the specific effect is different depending on which of the first pattern and the second pattern the effect is performed (when the effect pattern A3 is selected, the effect pattern A1, The probability variation big hit is notified at a higher rate than when A2 is selected). According to such a configuration, the player becomes interested in which of the first pattern and the second pattern the effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

(Means A10) In any one of the means A1 to A9, the effect execution means executes the third special effect according to the first motion of the movable body (the third pattern) (at the time of the first movable body motion effect). Lightning pattern effect is executed and second movable object operation effect is not executed Effect pattern B1, Lightning effect effect is executed during the first movable object operation effect, and Lightning effect effect is also executed during the second movable object operation effect The effect can be executed in the effect pattern B2), and when the effect is executed in the third pattern, the ratio of the predetermined state (probability change state) is higher than that in the case where the effect is executed in the first pattern. It may be configured. According to such a configuration, the player expects that the special effect of the second mode will be executed in accordance with the first motion of the movable body, but if the special motion of the first mode is temporarily performed in accordance with the first motion. Even when the effect is executed, the special effect of the second aspect is expected to be executed in accordance with the subsequent first operation, so that the interest in the special effect can be maintained.

(Means A11) In any one of the means A1 to A10, an operation means (push button 31B) operable by the player is further provided, and the special effect mode is changed according to the operation of the operation means (black image). It is possible to change the image in which the flame effect image 1010 is superimposed and displayed on 1001 to the image in which the lightning effect image 1020 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001). According to such a configuration, the player can expect a change in the aspect of the special effect due to the operation, and can enhance the interest of the special effect.

(Means A12) In any one of the means A1 to A7, a first motion (a standing motion that is a movement from the tilt position to the standing position) and a second motion (a tilt motion that is a movement from the standing position to the tilt position). ) Capable movable body (movable member 321), and effect (production control CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing an effect (effect symbol changing process (S75), big hit game in-process (S78), etc.), The effect execution means executes the first effect of the special effect in accordance with the first motion of the movable body. The first pattern (the flame effect effect is executed during the first movable object operation effect, and the second movable object operation effect is not executed. Effect pattern A1, an effect pattern A2) in which a flame effect effect is executed during the first movable body operation effect, and a flame effect effect is also executed in the second movable object operation effect, and a first operation in accordance with the first operation of the movable object. After performing the special effect of the aspect, the second pattern for performing the special effect of the second aspect different from the first aspect with the first operation after the second operation of the movable body (at the time of the first movable body operation effect) The effect can be executed with the effect pattern A3) in which the flame effect effect is executed and the lightning effect effect is executed in the second movable body operation effect, and when the effect is executed in the second pattern, It may be configured such that the ratio of the predetermined state (probably changed state) is higher than that in the case where the effect is executed in the pattern. According to such a configuration, the form of the special effect accompanying the first motion of the movable body is made different, and the effects are diversified, so that the interest in the effect when the movable body operates can be improved.

(Means A13) In the means A12, the special effect is a specific effect (a challenge effect that is executed during the execution of the fifth round and informs whether or not to be controlled to the probable state after the jackpot gaming state is finished). The first pattern and the second pattern are effects executed at a timing earlier than that (an effect of displaying an image in which the flame effect image 1010 or the lightning effect image 1020 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001 on the effect display device 5). According to which pattern the effect is executed, the ratio of the predetermined notification in the specific effect is different (when the effect pattern A3 is selected, it is more than when the effect patterns A1 and A2 are selected). The probability variation big hit is notified at a high rate). According to such a configuration, the player becomes interested in which of the first pattern and the second pattern the effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

(Means A14) In the means A12 or the means A13, the effect execution means executes a third effect special effect in accordance with the first motion of the movable body (third effect effect is executed during the first movable body motion effect). In the effect pattern B1, in which the second movable body motion effect is not executed, the lightning effect effect is executed in the first movable object motion effect, and the lightning effect effect is executed in the second movable object motion effect as well. Even if it is configured such that the effect can be executed and the effect is executed in the third pattern, the ratio of the predetermined state (probability change state) is higher than that in the case where the effect is executed in the first pattern. Good. According to such a configuration, the player expects that the special effect of the second mode will be executed in accordance with the first motion of the movable body, but if the special motion of the first mode is temporarily performed in accordance with the first motion. Even when the effect is executed, the special effect of the second aspect is expected to be executed in accordance with the subsequent first operation, so that the interest in the special effect can be maintained.

(Means A15) In any one of the means A12 to A14, an operation means (push button 31B) operable by the player is further provided, and the special effect mode is changed according to the operation of the operation means (black image). It is possible to change the image in which the flame effect image 1010 is superimposed and displayed on 1001 to the image in which the lightning effect image 1020 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001). According to such a configuration, the player can expect a change in the aspect of the special effect due to the operation, and can enhance the interest of the special effect.

(Means A16) In any one of the means A1 to A15, different light emission data is set in each layer of the data setting area according to the gaming state (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, the gaming state is It may be configured such that the combination of control data set in layers 1 to 5 is different depending on which of the low base state, the high base state and the big hit game state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to control the light emission of the light emitters according to the priority order according to the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Means A17) In the means A16, the light emission data for performing the light emission control of the light emitter according to the error notification is set to the layer having the highest priority among the layers in the data setting area, regardless of the game state. 42 (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, control data corresponding to error notification is set to the layer 5 having the highest priority, regardless of the gaming state). According to such a configuration, the light emission control of the light emitter can be performed with priority to the error notification regardless of the game state.

(Means A18) In any one of the means A1 to A17, the output means (for example, the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b, the motor drive driver 412, the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c) includes address information from the control means. Based on a control signal based on the serial communication method, a specific signal based on the parallel communication method (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11) is output to the electrical components corresponding to the address information, and a plurality of signals are output. Address information is discontinuously set in a predetermined settable range with respect to at least a part of the electric components (for example, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, each of the light emitter drivers 411a, 411b, 413a to Of the addresses that can be given to the 413c and the motor drive driver 412, the addresses [05] to [06] are unused addresses, and the addresses [04] to [07] are discontinuous. ) May be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a malfunction will occur in the control of the electric component when the address information included in the control signal output from the control unit is defective.

(Means A19) In any one of the means A1 to A17, the output means (for example, the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b, the motor drive driver 412, the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c) includes address information from the control means. Based on a control signal based on the serial communication method, a specific signal based on the parallel communication method (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11) is output to the electrical components corresponding to the address information, and a plurality of signals are output. With respect to the electric component, the address information is set in a range of a predetermined value (for example, address [02]) or more exceeding a minimum value (for example, address [00]) among values in a predetermined settable range ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, of the addresses that can be given to the respective light emitter drivers 411a, 411b, 413a to 413c and the motor drive driver 412, the smallest value (for example, the address [00]) is immediately given. Rather than being configured so as to be given from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value (for example, address [02]) or more, an address (for example, addresses [00] to [[ 01]) is configured to be an unused address)). With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a malfunction will occur in the control of the electric component when the address information included in the control signal output from the control unit is defective.

Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described below include the inventions according to (1) to (4) below. The invention according to the above means A1 to A19 may further have the configurations of (1) to (4).

(1) Display means (effect display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects (reach effect, etc.),
A movable body (movable member 321 or the like),
A movable body effecting means capable of executing a movable body effect for operating the movable object (a CPU 120 for effect control, a movable object effecting process in the effect symbol changing process of S75 in the effect control process process of FIG. 40, and the like),
When the movable body effect is executed, a different effect effect display (battle reach effect) among a plurality of types of effect display (battle reach effect, story reach effect, etc.) is performed. The particle effect image 71 according to the effect, the flame effect image 73 according to the story reach effect, etc. can be displayed on the display means (FIGS. 51, 52, etc.) (S75 in the effect control process process of FIG. 40). Production effect display processing in production symbol variation processing).

With such a configuration, when the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to display effect effect displays in different modes depending on which effect display is performed among the plurality of types of effect displays. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect effect in which the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display unit are linked.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
Of the effect displays for which the movable body effect is executed, when a specific type of effect display (battle reach effect or the like) is executed, the effect effect display in a specific mode (particles in FIGS. 51D and 51E) It is possible to execute the effect of superimposing the effect image 71 and the like) on the specific type of effect display (display of the victory effect image) (FIGS. 51(A) to (G), etc.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to link a specific type of effect display in which the movable body effect is executed and an effect display of the display means, and the operation of the movable body and the display means by the specific type of effect display can be performed. It is possible to further enhance the effect effect that is linked with the effect effect display of.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
When a predetermined type of effect display (story reach effect or the like) is executed among the effect displays in which the movable object effect is executed, the effect effect display in a predetermined mode (FIGS. 52D and 52E, flame) It is possible to execute the effect of superimposing the effect image 73 and the like) on the predetermined image (the black image 72 and the like in FIGS. 52D and 52E) displayed in the entire display area of the display unit (FIG. 52 ( A) to (G) etc.).

According to such a configuration, in addition to the fact that a predetermined effect of a predetermined type in which the movable body effect is executed and the effect display on the display unit can be linked, the movable body effect is emphasized to play the game. The interest of can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The movable body (movable member 321 and the like) is movable to a standby position (first position and the like shown in FIGS. 31 and 32) and an advancing position (second position and the like shown in FIGS. 31 and 32),
When the gaming machine is started, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable body (initial operation in the movable member initialization process of step S51B of FIG. 39) and a running-in operation of moving the movable body (FIG. It further includes a control unit (the CPU 120 for effect control, etc.) that executes step S51A of 39, the operation in the moving-member running-in process of FIG. 41, and the like.

With such a configuration, the confirming operation for confirming the operation of the movable body and the running-in operation for moving the movable body are executed. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the movement of the movable body from being unfamiliar and affecting the movement of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the movable body from not operating properly.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a game control board (main board). It is a figure which shows the structural example of a drive control board, and the structural example of the light emission body control board for performing lighting control of the board side LED. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the light emission body control substrate for performing lighting control of top frame LED9a, left frame LED9b, and right frame LED9c. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each input/output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG. 5. It is an explanatory view for explaining a slew rate setting of a through output of a clock signal and data. It is an explanatory view for explaining a control data format. It is an explanatory view for explaining an output timing of a signal from each drive output terminal in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is an explanatory view for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is an explanatory view for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is an explanatory view for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification when a control signal which one light-emitting body driver mounted on the light-emitting body control board outputs is branched on a board. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 3; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 3; FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification Example 4; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification Example 5; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 6; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 6; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 6; FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 7. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 7. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit in Modification 7. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address given to each light emitter driver and a motor drive driver. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address given to each light emitter driver and a motor drive driver. (A) is a front view showing the effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. It is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is seen from diagonally front. It is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is seen from diagonally behind. (A) is a front view showing a state in which the movable portion is in a tilted position, and (B) is a state in which the movable portion is in a standing position. (A) is a rear view showing a pinion gear and (B) a rack gear. FIG. 6A is a schematic view showing a state where the movable member is in the first position, and FIG. (A) is a side view of a schematic diagram showing a state where the movable member is in the first position, and (B) is a state in which the movable member is in the second position. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a pinion gear meshes with a rack gear, (B) is a state in which the rack gear is moving, and (C) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the rack gear is restricted. (A)-(D) is a principal part enlarged view which shows the state of the gear until it becomes a regulation state. 6A is a schematic diagram showing a regulated state, FIG. 6B is a state in which the pinion gear is changed to a deregulated state by rotating the pinion gear in a first operation direction, and FIG. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram showing a regulated state, FIG. 6B is a state in which the pinion gear is changed to a deregulated state by rotating the pinion gear in a second operation direction, and FIG. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a movable member break-in process. It is a figure which shows an example of a control data area. It is a time chart which shows an LED control example. It is a time chart which shows an LED control example. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production execution setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production execution setting processing. (A)-(D) is explanatory drawing which shows the condition changed to a regulation state by the regulation means as the modification 1 of a movable part drive mechanism. (A)-(D) is explanatory drawing which shows the condition changed to a regulation state by the regulation means as the modification 2 of a movable part drive mechanism. (A)-(D) is explanatory drawing which shows the condition changed to a regulation state by the regulation means as the modification 3 of a movable part drive mechanism. FIG. 9A is an explanatory view showing a restricting portion as a modified example 4 of the movable portion drive mechanism, and FIG. It is a display screen diagram of the effect display device when the battle reach effect is executed. It is the display screen figure of the production display when the story reach production is executed. It is a timing chart showing a control example of an effect effect and a movable object effect in a specific super reach effect. It is a timing chart showing a control example of an effect effect and a movable body combination operation effect in a specific super reach effect. It is the figure which shows one example of the production pattern of movable body operation production and effect production. It is a display screen diagram showing a display example of the effect display device when the movable body motion effect and the effect effect are executed. It is a timing chart showing a control example of a movable body motion effect and an effect effect. It is a display screen diagram showing another display example of the effect display device when the movable body motion effect and the effect effect are executed. It is a timing chart showing another control example of the movable body motion effect and the effect effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining an output timing of a signal from each drive output terminal in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is a figure for explaining the principle of light emission production. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of a light emission pattern table. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of a light emission production distribution table. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of a light emission control table. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the data for light emission control generation. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the data for light emission control generation. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of a light emitting pattern and a temporal change of RGB values corresponding to each light emitting pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of gradation control data. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of gradation control data. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of gradation control data. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the flow of light emission production processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of a light emission pattern table. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the data for light emission control generation. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of a light emitting pattern and a temporal change of RGB values corresponding to each light emitting pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the data for light emission control generation. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of a light emitting pattern and a temporal change of RGB values corresponding to each light emitting pattern. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of a light emitting pattern and a temporal change of RGB values corresponding to each light emitting pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the flow of reservation display notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of a prefetching mode determination table. It is a figure for explaining the principle of light emission production. It is explanatory drawing of the change of the light emission color for every light emission part.

[1. First Embodiment]
[Structure of pachinko machine]
A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the rear (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. It will be described as a reference. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface that faces a player who plays a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment, showing a layout of main members. A pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as a gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (frame) that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. 3 and 3. The game board 2 is provided with a game area 10 which is surrounded by the guide rails 2b and which is substantially circular in a front view. In this game area 10, a game ball as a game medium is shot from a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and is driven in. Further, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is rotatably provided around the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and the glass door frame 50 can open and close the game area 10. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area 10 can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is formed of a synthetic resin material having a light-transmitting property such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, and methacrylic resin in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. It is mainly composed of a board face plate (not shown) provided with a guide rail 2b and the like, and a spacer member (not shown) integrally attached to the back side of the board face plate. The game board 2 is a non-translucent member such as a plywood board and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It may be configured as.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the lower right position of the game area 10 in the example shown in FIG. 1), a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot-matrix LED (light emitting diode), etc., and are identified in the special symbol game which is an example of the variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as “special symbols”) that are possible plural types of identification information (special identification information) are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display or variable display). For example, the first special symbol display unit 4A and the second special symbol display unit 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns with different combinations of what is turned on and what is turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

In the following, the special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". ..

In the vicinity of the center of the game area 10 on the game board 2, an effect display device 5 as display means is provided. The effect display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 4B in the special symbol game, respectively. In the effect symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display portions such as three, effect symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each, are variably displayed. The variable display of the effect symbols is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are arranged. When the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special figure game, in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the effect display device 5, The fixed effect design (final stop design) that is the variable display result of the design is stopped and displayed.

Thus, in the display area of the effect display device 5, a special drawing game using the first special drawing on the first special symbol display device 4A, or a special special game using the second special drawing on the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the drawing game, a plurality of types of distinguishable effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the fixed effect symbols that are the variable display result are derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols is to end the variable display by performing stop display (also called complete stop display or final stop display) of identification information such as effect symbols. ..

"Left", "middle", "right" in each effect symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the effect symbols that are variably displayed include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese characters). It may be a number, an alphabetic character, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image. The character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or , A symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). A corresponding design number is attached to each of the effect symbols. For example, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to the alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the effect symbols are not limited to eight types, and may be of any type (eg, seven types or nine types) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination and a lost combination can be configured.

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the first reserved display device 25A and the second reserved display device 25B are provided. On each of the first hold display device 25A and the second hold display device 25B, the hold storage number (special map hold storage number) as the number of the hold storage information of the variable display corresponding to the special drawing game is displayed so that it can be specified. Memory display is performed.

Here, in order to suspend the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It is generated based on the winning prize for starting by entering. That is, the starting condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game and the variable display of the effect symbol is established, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. If the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

In the first special symbol display 4A, it is possible to specify the number of holding storage information (first holding storage information) generated based on the first starting winning prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening. The number of the first special figure reservation storages is displayed by the lighting of the LED (the number of lighting). In the second hold indicator 25B, the number of hold storage information (second hold storage information) generated based on the second start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening can be specified. 2 The number of special figure reservation memory is displayed by the lighting of the LED (the number of lighting).

A first hold display area 5D and a second hold display area 5U are set at two places on the left and right in the lower part of the display area of the effect display device 5. In the first hold display area 5D, the first special figure hold storage number capable of specifying the number of the first hold storage information generated based on the first start winning is displayed by the number of the hold images H of the sphere (circle). To be done. In the second hold display area 5U, the second special figure hold storage number capable of specifying the number of the second hold storage information generated based on the second start winning is displayed by the number of images of the hold image H of the sphere (circle). To be done.

In the first hold display area 5D, the hold image H is displayed in a manner that the hold image increases on the left side every time the first hold storage information occurs, and the variable display based on the first hold storage information is executed. Each time, the reserved image H at the right end corresponding to the first reserved storage information is erased, and the remaining reserved images H are shifted one by one to the right. In the second hold display area 5U, the hold image is displayed in such a manner that the hold image H increases on the right side every time the second hold storage information is generated, and the variable display based on the second hold storage information is executed. Each time, the reserved image H at the left end portion corresponding to the second reserved storage information is erased, and the remaining reserved images are shifted leftward by one.

The variable corresponding display corresponding to the variable display is displayed during execution of the variable display corresponding to the erased (moved or shifted) suspended display from each of the first suspended display area 5D and the second suspended display area 5U. An active display area AHA for displaying an image (hereinafter referred to as an active image or active display) AH is formed in the center of the reserved display area. In the active display area AHA, the hold image H displayed in the first hold display area 5D or the second hold display area 5U has been displayed until then, for example, moved (shifted) to the active display area. The active image AH is displayed in a mode in which it can be specified that the image corresponds to the reserved image. In addition, the active display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the effect display device 5.

It should be noted that the hold display information may be displayed in the hold display area in a display mode in which the first hold display area 5D and the second hold display area 5U are summed without distinction. With such a summed pending storage display, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of satisfied execution conditions in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied.

With respect to the hold image H displayed in each of the first hold display area 5D and the second hold display area 5U, a hold display mode for changing the hold display mode before the variable display of the target hold storage information is executed. A change effect may be executed. In the hold display mode change effect, the display mode such as the color or shape of the hold image H is changed.

For example, the color of the hold image H can be changed to blue, green, and red. When the hold display mode change effect is determined to be executed at a predetermined ratio, and the variable display result based on the hold storage information of the effect target is the big hit display result, the ratio of blue<green<red is changed. When the color of the reserved image H is selected and determined, and on the other hand, when the variable display result is the disagreement display result, the color of the retained image H after the change is selected and determined in a ratio of red<green<blue. As a result, the degree of expectation of a big hit based on the color of the changed hold image H when the hold display mode change effect is executed is set to have a ratio of blue<green<red. Therefore, when the hold display mode change effect is executed, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a big hit based on the color of the changed hold image.

Similarly to the hold image H, the display form change effect is executed for the active image AH, and the display form such as the color or shape of the hold image H is changed. With respect to the display mode change effect of such an active display, the display mode such as the changed color or shape is determined in a mode in which the degree of expectation for the big hit can be specified at the same selection ratio as the hold display mode change mode. It In addition, regarding the active display, the display mode change effect may not be executed.

Below the effect display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed by the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second starting winning opening as a starting area (second starting area).

As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning hole. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning port by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the ON state. It will be in an enlarged open state that is easy to enter.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the first special figure reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, " 4”) or less, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the second special figure reservation storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, " 4”) or less, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls paid out based on the game balls being detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of the playing balls being detected by the second starting opening switch 22B. May be the same or different from each other.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific area is changed to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a big prize hole.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the OFF state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. Disable it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes between an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state where the game ball cannot pass (entry) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do. Instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the special winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. 2, for example. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when you pass (enter). Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, which is the first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the special winning opening. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

A normal symbol display device 20 is provided above the second hold display device 25B. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary pattern (also referred to as "general drawing" or "normal drawing") that is variably displayed (variable display). Such variable display of normal symbols is called a normal figure game (also called "normal figure game").

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure reservation display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reservations as the number of effective passage balls that have passed through the passage gate 41.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. You may be asked. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball that has entered one of the general winning openings has been detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. At the lowermost part of the game area 10, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper and left positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and further, on the outer periphery of the game area 10, a top frame LED 9a provided on the front frame, A left frame LED 9b and a right frame LED 9c are provided. In this embodiment, the top frame LED 9a is provided above the front frame, the left frame LED 9b is provided on the left side of the front frame, and the right frame LED 9c is provided on the right side of the front frame. There is. The game board 2 is also provided with board-side LEDs 9d and 9e. In this embodiment, a board side LED 9d is provided on the left side of the game board 2, and a board side LED 9e is provided on the right side of the game board 2. A decorative LED is arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area 10 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Good.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball as a game medium toward the game area 10 is provided. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hit ball operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor of the hit ball launch device (not shown) and a touch ring (touch sensor).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area 10, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied to a launching device (not shown). An upper plate (hit ball supply plate) for holding (storing) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided for holding (storing) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operating stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is applied when the player holds the operating stick). There is.

A controller sensor unit 35A for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operation rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the controller sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the side of the player who faces the pachinko gaming machine 1. Pair) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player's side. The photo sensor may be included.

As a member forming the upper plate, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate main body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be able to detect a pressing operation by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35B for detecting a pressing operation by the player performed on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko game machine 1, such as that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 provided in the game area 10 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2, the ordinary symbol display 20 executes the variable display of the ordinary symbol. After the universal figure starting condition for the is satisfied, for example, the previous universal figure game is finished, based on the universal figure start condition for starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol is established, the ordinary symbol display device The public figure game by 20 is started.

In this public figure game, after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, when the predetermined time which is the general figure fluctuation time elapses, the fixed ordinary symbol which is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped (displayed). At this time, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, as the fixed ordinary symbol, for example, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or a symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is “ordinary symbol loss”. Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is "universal symbol", the expansion opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip that constitutes the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position. When a predetermined time elapses, the normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

After the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied because the previous special figure game or the jackpot gaming state has ended. In addition, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. After that, the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, by ending the previous special figure game or the big hit game state.

In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, when the variable display time as the special symbol variation time elapses, the variable display of the special symbol The finalized special symbol (result of special symbol display) that is the result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as the specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, " It becomes "miss". Note that a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed, and when the predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a result of the predetermined display, , The small hit game state as a special game state different from the big hit game state may be controlled.

After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", it becomes a big hit game state (advantageous state) as a specific game state in which a round advantageous to the player (also called "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. Controlled.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are big hit symbols, and the special symbols indicating the “−” symbols are lost symbols. .. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, a special symbol indicating the number “2” may be set as the small hit symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big hit symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, the special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol or a lost symbol.

After the jackpot design showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" as the fixed special symbols in the special figure game is stopped and displayed as "big hit" as the specific display result, in the jackpot gaming state, the special variable In the period until the special winning opening door of the winning ball device 7 elapses a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) winning balls are generated. , Open the special winning opening. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is brought into the first state (open state), which is advantageous for the player, is executed.

The special winning a prize sphere device, by receiving the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closing the big winning a prize, the big prize award door which opened the big prize award during the execution of the round. 7 is changed to a second state (closed state), which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "16"). Even before the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round may be ended by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball has not been won in the special winning opening). ..

Of the rounds in the big hit game state, the round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also called a short-term open round.

In the case of stopping and displaying the small hit symbol (for example, the number "2"), if these small hit symbols are derived as fixed special symbols, if they are controlled to the small hit game state as the special game state. good. Specifically, in the small hitting game state, for example, as in the above-mentioned short-term open big hitting game state in which the ball (prize ball) is practically not obtained, the special winning a prize ball device 7 allows the player to make a big winning opening. It suffices to execute the variable winning operation for changing to the advantageous first state (open state).

In the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the effect display device 5, the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 4A and In the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B, in response to the start of one of the special figure games, the variable display of the effect symbols is started. Then, the period from the start of the variable display of the effect symbols to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed effect symbols in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Then, the variable display state of the effect design may be a predetermined reach state.

Here, the reach state, the effect design which is stopped and displayed when the effect design stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination (“reach variation pattern”). (Also referred to as) is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the effect symbols are changing in synchronization while forming all or part of the big hit combination. Specifically, in some of the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (eg, "left" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5R etc.) The remaining effect symbol display area (for example, "Medium" effect) that is not yet stopped and displayed when the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol indicating the alphanumeric character "7") that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. In the display state where the effect symbols are changing in the symbol display area 5C or the like, or the effect symbol is a big hit in all or part of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" It is a display state in which all or part of the combination is changed while changing in synchronization.

Further, in response to the reach state, the fluctuation speed of the effect design is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the effect design is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image different from the effect design, or changing the variation mode of the effect design, a different effect operation from before the reach state is executed. May be done. The production operation such as the display of the character image or the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the production design is referred to as reach production display (or simply reach production). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the effect display device 5, but also the voice output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light emitting elements such as the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, and the board side LEDs 9d and 9e. The lighting operation (flashing operation), the operation of the movable member 321 and the like may be included in an operation mode different from the operation mode before the reach state.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of kinds of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. And, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also called "reliability", "big hit reliability", "expectation", or "big hit expectation"") is different in each reach mode. That is, it is possible to change the possibility that the variable display result is a “big hit” depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the effect symbol is not changed to the reach state after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed effect symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of effect symbols is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “miss”.

As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, when the special symbol that is the lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the fixed effect symbol forming a predetermined reach-miss combination may be stopped and displayed. The variation display result of such effect symbols is referred to as a variation display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variation display result is "miss".

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the big hit symbol showing the number "3" among the special symbols which is the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it corresponds to the variation display state of the effect symbol being the reach state. Then, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed effect symbol which is the predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as "non-probable variation big hit combination") of the plurality of kinds of big hit combinations is stopped and displayed. The reach effect may not be executed, and the uncertain variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as the finalized effect design.

The fixed effect symbols that are usually the jackpot combination (non-probable variation jackpot combination) are variably displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the effect display device 5, for example. Of the effect symbols with the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, any one of the effect symbols with the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “ It suffices as long as it is stopped and displayed in line on a predetermined effective line in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "middle" and "right". The effect symbols having the even number "2", "4", "6", and "8" that constitute the normal jackpot combination are called normal symbols (also referred to as "non-probability variation symbols").

Corresponding to the fact that the fixed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the normal big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed effect symbol of the normal big hit combination (non-probable variation big hit combination) is displayed as a stop. The variable display mode is referred to as a “non-probable variation” (also called “normal big hit”) variable display mode (also called “big hit type”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. It should be noted that the normal big hit combination (uncertain variation big hit combination) may be stopped and displayed as the finalized effect design without executing the reach effect. Based on the fact that the variation display result is "big hit" in the "non-probable variation" big hit type, the game is controlled to a normally open big hit game state, and after that, time shortening control (time saving control) is performed. By performing the time saving control, the variable display time of the special symbol in the special figure game (special figure change time) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving control, as will be described later, the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased, and the winning frequency of the normal variable winning ball device 6B is increased, so-called Den Chu support is implemented. Here, the normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, after power-on). The same control as the state in which the initialization process is executed) is performed. In the time saving control, one of a condition that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot gaming state is ended and that the variable display result is “big hit” is established first. Sometimes you just need to quit.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, if the probability variation big hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the numbers “5” and “7” among the special symbols to be the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the effect symbol In response to the fact that the reach state is reached, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variation display mode of the effect design is "normal" is executed, among the plurality of kinds of jackpot combinations, a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination There is a case where the finalized effect design is stopped and displayed. The reach effect may not be executed, and the probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as the finalized effect design. The fixed effect symbol combination which is the probability variation big hit combination, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" in the effect display device 5 is "1". ~ Of the effect symbols of "8", the effect symbols having the symbol number "5" or "7" are in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It is only necessary that the lines are stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. The effect symbols having the symbol numbers "5" and "7" that form the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. When the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game, the fixed effect symbol which is usually the big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as the variable display result of the effect symbol.

Regardless of whether the fixed effect symbol is the normal big hit combination or the probability variation big hit combination, the variation display mode in which the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game is a variation display result of "big hit". In this case, it is referred to as a “probable change” variation display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”). In the present embodiment, of the "probable variation" jackpot types, "5" as the confirmed special symbol, "7" in the variable display result, "big hit", based on the normal open jackpot gaming state After that, stochastic variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with time saving control.

By performing these probability variation controls, the probability that the variable display result (special figure display result) is a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved to be higher than in the normal state. The probability variation control may be terminated when the condition that the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled again after the big hit game state ends. Similar to the time saving control, when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times the same as the time saving number or 90 times different from the time saving number) after the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation control ends. May be. In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when "probability variation falling" is determined to end the probability variation control in the probability variation falling lottery that is executed each time the special figure game is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Good.

When the time saving control is performed, the control for making the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary figure game by the ordinary symbol display device 20 (the ordinary figure variation time) shorter than that in the normal state, or the variation of the ordinary symbol in each ordinary figure game Control for improving the probability that the display result is "Public hit" compared to that in the normal state, tilt control of the movable wing piece in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B based on that the variation display result is "Public hit" In order to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning port, such as control for making the tilt control time for performing longer than in the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state By increasing the possibility that the starting condition is satisfied, a control (electricity chewing support control) that is advantageous to the player is performed. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the player to enter the game ball into the second start winning port with the time saving control is advantageous for the player, and is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the expanded opening state is higher than that in the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes "big hit" is shortened. The period in which the high opening control can be executed is also called a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period in which the time saving control is performed.

The game state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a time saving state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a highly accurate state. The gaming state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a highly accurate high base state. Although not set as a controlled game state in the present embodiment, the probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the time saving control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a highly accurate low base state. .. Further, only the gaming state in which the time reduction control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control may be referred to as a "probability variation state" in particular, and may be referred to as a time reduction probability variation state in order to distinguish it from the highly accurate low base state. On the other hand, the certainty variation state in which only the certainty variation control is performed and neither the time saving control nor the high opening control is performed (highly accurate low base state) is sometimes referred to as the no time saving certainty variation state in order to distinguish from the highly accurate high base state. The time saving state in which the time saving control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low accuracy high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time saving control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low accurate low base state. When at least one of time saving control and probability variation control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special figure game can be frequently executed, and the probability that the variable display result in each special figure game is a "big hit" As a result, the player is in an advantageous state. A gaming state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state is also called a special gaming state.

In the case of displaying the small hit symbol in a stopped state, after controlling the small hit game state described above, the game state is not changed, and the variation display result becomes the "small hit" before the game state. It should be controlled continuously.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 as shown in FIG. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Further, a drive control board 16B and light emitter control boards 16C to 16F are mounted as control boards connected to the effect control board 12 via the effect control relay board 16A. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 or the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11, the first special symbol and the second special symbol by performing lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) that configures the first special symbol indicator 4A and the second special symbol indicator 4B. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by turning on/off/coloring the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that captures detection signals from various switches for detecting a game ball and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 or the like for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and produces the effect display device 5 and the speakers 8L, 8R. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric components such as the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, the board side LEDs 9d and 9e, the movable portion 302, and the movable member 321 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 controls the display operation of the effect display device 5 and all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame provided on the game frame side. LED 9c, all or part of the operation of turning on/off the board-side LEDs 9d, 9e provided on the game board 2 side, all or part of the operation of the movable part 302 and the movable member 321, and predetermined for the production electric parts. It has a function of determining the control content for executing the effect operation of.

The effect control board 12 is connected with a wire for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 5, a wire for transmitting an audio signal (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the like. .. In addition, wirings for transmitting various signals are also connected to the drive control board 16B, the light emitter control board 16C, and the light emitter control board 16D via the effect control relay board 16A.

The information signal transmitted to the drive control board 16B is a drive control signal indicating a command or control data for operating the movable portion 302 or the movable member 321 by driving the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330. It only needs to be included.

The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16C may include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters provided as the board-side LEDs 9d and 9e.

If the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16D includes a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters provided as left frame LEDs 9b on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, Good. In addition, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16E includes a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters provided as the top frame LED 9a above the gaming machine frame 3. Good. The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16F includes a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters provided as the right frame LED 9c on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. Just go.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16D relays only the effect control relay board 16A from the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. And then transmitted. Further, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16E is transmitted from the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 by relaying the light emitter control board 16D in addition to the effect control relay board 16A. Further, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16F is relayed from the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 to the effect control relay board 16A, as well as to the light emitter control board 16D and the light emitter control board 16E. And then transmitted.

The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is installed.

The effect control relay board 16A is installed in a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 2, and is transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the drive control board 16B, the light emitter control board 16C, and the light emitter control board 16D. Relay various signals. The back pack may be attached to the central portion on the back surface side of the game board 2, and an opening facing the effect display device 5 may be formed in the center thereof. The back pack may be provided so as to cover the main board 11, the sound control board 13, the drive control board 16B, the light emitter control board 16C, and the like from the rear side. An effect control board box in which the effect control board 12 is housed may be attached to the rear surface side of the back pack.

The drive control board 16B is a drive control control board that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12 controls the rotation and movement of the movable part 302. A driver IC or the like for controlling the movement of the member 321 is mounted. The output signal from the drive control board 16B is transmitted to the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330.

The light emitter control board 16C is a light emitter output control board mounted on the game board 2 and provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12 and the like. Various circuits for driving the light emitters for controlling lighting of a plurality of light emitters provided as the side LEDs 9d and 9e are mounted.

The luminous body control boards 16D to 16F are control boards for outputting luminous bodies, which are mounted on the gaming machine frame 3 and provided separately from the effect control board 12, such as commands and control data from the effect control board 12. On the basis of the above, various circuits for driving the light emitters for controlling lighting of a plurality of light emitters provided as the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c are mounted.

In addition to the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also provided with, for example, a board for controlling the lighting of the light emitting section 321A provided on the movable member 321. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main substrate 11. The gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have any configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as what is called a sensor. Anything you have is acceptable. Further, on the main board 11, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, the first holding display device 25A, the second holding display device 25B, the public figure holding display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the production control command, for example, the variation time of the production symbol, the type of reach production, and the pseudo-relation (which is originally one variation corresponding to one reserved memory, is changed a plurality of times corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories). It is an effect display that makes it appear that the fluctuations are continuously performed, and for one start winning, it is as if the fluctuation display (variable display) of the symbol was performed multiple times Fluctuations indicating fluctuation modes such as the presence/absence of temporary stop and re-changing for a predetermined number of times for all the symbol strings (left, middle, right) within the fluctuation time determined for the winning. A variation pattern designation command indicating a pattern, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the effect display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a ceiling frame. Includes a light emitter control command used to control the lighting operation of the LEDs 9a, the left frame LEDs 9b, the right frame LEDs 9c, the board side LEDs 9d and 9e, and a drive control command used to control the operation of the movable member 321. Has been.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and a numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 are provided.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals are also performed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the production control board 12 is provided with a production control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores a production control program and fixed data, and a work area of the production control CPU 120. RAM 122, the display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120, and the random number that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value. A circuit 124 and an I/O 125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121 to execute the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121 by a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variable data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the variable data, and the effect control CPU 120 writes in the RAM 122. A variation data read operation for reading various temporarily stored variation data, a reception operation in which the production control CPU 120 receives an input of various signals from outside the production control board 12 via the I/O 125, and the production control CPU 120 performs I/O. A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the production control board 12 via O125 is also performed. The electric parts related to execution of production control, such as the production control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 in the production control board 12, are also referred to as a production control microcomputer.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 5 is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 and can be visually recognized through the opening 2c formed in the game board 2. A frame-shaped center decoration frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2. A production unit 300 is provided between the rear surface of the game board 2 and the production display device 5, and the production control board 12 includes various motors (first production motor 303, which are provided in the production unit 300). The second effect motor 330), a solenoid, a sensor, a plurality of electronic components such as a light emitting diode (LED) are connected. In addition, in FIG. 2, among the electronic components, illustrations other than the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 are omitted.

As with the main board 11, for example, a random number value (also referred to as a random number for effect) for determining the type of various effects such as a notice effect is set on the effect control board 12 side.

In the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, various data tables used for controlling the effect operation are stored in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, and pattern data that forms various effect control patterns. There is.

As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 includes various effect devices (for example, effect display device 5 and speakers 8L and 8R, top frame LED 9a, left frame LED 9b, right frame LED 9c, board side LEDs 9d and 9e, movable member 321 and the like. An effect control pattern table that stores a plurality of kinds of effect control patterns used to control effect operations by an effect model or the like is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data or the like indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special figure change time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like may be stored.

The special figure variation time production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol which is the special figure display result. , The production display operation in the production design variation display operation, reach production, re-lottery production, etc., or various production display operations that do not accompany the production design variation display Has been done. The advance notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed corresponding to the advance notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. Various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control contents thereof.

In the special figure variation time production control pattern, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns in which the production mode in each reach production is different may be included for each variation pattern for executing the reach production.

In addition, as the notice effect executed during the variable display of the effect symbols, for example, as described later, a notice that the movable member 321 as a movable body (movable object) is raised, or the player stick controller 31A or push button. A big hit such as an operation notice executed on condition that 31B is operated, a step-up notice that a predetermined image is switched step by step, a dialogue notice that a character appears and speaks a dialogue, a cut-in notice that a predetermined image is interrupted and displayed A big hit notice production that suggests the possibility of, a reach notice that suggests whether it will be a reach, a pseudo-announcement that announces whether it will be a pseudo-reliance, a stop symbol notice that announces a stop symbol, a game state probability It includes a plurality of advance notices executed at the start of variable display and at the time of reaching the reach, such as a latent notice for notifying whether or not it is in a fluctuating state (whether or not it is latent).

FIG. 3A shows a configuration example of the drive control board 16B. As shown in FIG. 3A, a motor drive driver 412 is mounted on the drive control board 16B. A control signal from the production control CPU 120 of the production control board 12 is input to the motor drive driver 412 via the production control relay board 16A in a serial signal format. Then, the motor drive driver 412 controls the drive of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 based on the drive control information indicated by the input control signal.

FIG. 3B shows a configuration example of the light emitter control board 16C for controlling the lighting of the board-side LEDs 9d and 9e. As shown in FIG. 3B, light emitter drivers 411a and 411b are mounted on the light emitter control board 16C. A control signal from the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 is input to the light emitter driver 411a in a serial signal format via the effect control relay board 16A. Then, the light-emitter driver 411a controls the lighting of the board-side LED 9d based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal. In addition, a control signal from the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 is input to the light emitter driver 411b in a serial signal format via the effect control relay board 16A and further via the light emitter driver 411a. .. Then, the light-emitter driver 411b controls the lighting of the board-side LED 9e based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

As shown in FIG. 3(2), in the light emitter control board 16C, the control signals transmitted from the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board 16C. By being transmitted (in this example, transmitted from the light emitter driver 411a to the light emitter driver 411b), it is configured to be transmitted to each light emitter driver.

FIG. 4 shows a configuration example of the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F for performing lighting control of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c. As shown in FIG. 4, a light emitter driver 413b is mounted on the light emitter control board 16D. A control signal from the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 is input to the light emitter driver 413b in a serial signal format via the effect control relay board 16A. Then, the light emitter driver 413b controls the lighting of the left frame LED 9b based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal. In FIG. 4, the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F are connected to each other via a wiring member such as a flexible cable or a wire harness.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a light emitter driver 413a is mounted on the light emitter control board 16E. A control signal from the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 is input to the light emitter driver 413a in a serial signal format via the effect control relay board 16A and further via the light emitter control board 16D. It Then, the light emitter driver 413a controls the lighting of the top frame LED 9a based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a light emitter driver 413c is mounted on the light emitter control board 16F. To the light emitter driver 413c, a control signal from the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 passes through the effect control relay board 16A, and further via the light emitter control board 16D and the light emitter control board 16E. Input in serial signal format. Then, the light emitter driver 413c controls the lighting of the right frame LED 9c based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

As shown in FIG. 4, in the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F, the control signals transmitted from the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 are light emitters mounted on different light emitter control boards 16D to 16F, respectively. By sequentially transmitting between the drivers 413a to 413c, it is configured to be transmitted to each of the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c.

In addition, in this embodiment, each LED provided on the game board 2 is comprehensively expressed as a board-side LED 9d, 9e, but specifically, the board-side LED 9d is provided on the left side of the game board 2. It is assumed that a plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided, and a plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided as a board side LED 9e on the right side of the game board 2. Further, in this embodiment, each LED provided in the game frame is comprehensively expressed as a top frame LED 9a, a left frame LED 9b, and a right frame LED 9c, but specifically, above the game frame. A plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided as the top frame LED 9a, a plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided as the left frame LED 9b on the left side of the game frame, and the right side of the game frame It is assumed that a plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided as the right frame LED 9c.

Further, in this embodiment, the motor drive driver 412, the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b for controlling the lighting of the board-side LEDs 9d and 9e, and the lighting control of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c are performed. The light-emitter drivers 413a to 413c are realized by using the same type of serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)). FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a serial-parallel conversion circuit used as the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b, the motor drive driver 412, and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each input/output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG.

The serial-parallel conversion circuits used as the light-emitter drivers 411a and 411b, the motor drive driver 412, and the light-emitter drivers 413a to 413c convert input serial signal format signals into 24-channel parallel signal format signals. There are two types, one that outputs the signal in the serial signal format and the other that outputs the signal in the serial signal format that is input after converting it to the parallel signal format of 12 channels. Since the same configurations and functions are provided only with the differences, in the examples shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described as a representative, and a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described. Only the differences will be described. In this embodiment, the light-emitter drivers 411a and 411b are realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, and the motor drive driver 412 and the light-emitter drivers 413a to 413c are formed by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. Will be realized.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, CLK/I for inputting a clock signal from the effect control CPU 120 to the serial-parallel conversion circuit via the effect control relay board 16A and the light emitter control boards 16D and 16E. DATA/I terminals for inputting terminals and data are provided. In addition, a part of the input clock signal and data is branched in the serial-parallel conversion circuit and can be directly through-output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit, and the CLK/O terminal for through-outputting the clock signal and the data are output. A DATA/O terminal for through output is provided.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the light emitter driver 413b of the light emitter control board 16D emits a control signal (clock signal and data) input via the effect control relay board 16A. Although it is outputting to the light emitter driver 413a of the control board 16E, clock signals and data are respectively output from the CLK/O terminal and the DATA/O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit which realizes the light emitter driver 413b. It is configured to be output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes. Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the light emitter driver 413a of the light emitter control board 16E receives a control signal (via the control board 16A for effect control and the light emitter control board 16D). The clock signal and data) are output to the light emitter driver 413c of the light emitter control board 16F. Clock signals are output from the CLK/O terminal and the DATA/O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the light emitter driver 413a. The signals and data are output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the light emitter driver 413c.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the clock signal input from the CLK/I terminal and another part of the data input from the DATA/I terminal are input to the decoder and converted from the serial signal format into 24 channels. Of the parallel signal format. Then, after being once stored in each register provided in the register block, pulse width modulation (PWM) is performed using an internal clock signal (in this example, an internal clock signal of 6 MHz) by an internal oscillation clock circuit, and each is It is output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the case of a 12-channel circuit, it is converted into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal and output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11. The output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are supplied to, for example, a light emitting body such as an LED or an operating motor.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with terminals AD0 to AD4 (AD0 to AD5 in a 12-channel circuit) for decoding address input. By setting each to H (high) or L (low), it is possible to set an address for each serial-parallel conversion circuit. The data input from DATA/I also includes address information, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit decodes only the data whose address information included in the input data matches the set address into a parallel signal format signal. Output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23.

Since the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with five terminals for decoding address input AD0 to AD4, a maximum of 32 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 32 serial-parallel conversions can be set. It is possible to connect circuits. Further, in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, since 6 terminals AD0 to AD5 are provided for decoding address input, a maximum of 64 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 64 serial-parallel conversions can be set. It is possible to connect circuits.

The S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the slew rate of the through output of the clock signal output from the CLK/O terminal and the through output of the data output from the DATA/O terminal. .. When the S terminal is set to L (low), the through output of the clock signal and the data is set to the output of the normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and the data is set to the low slew rate. Set to output.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the slew rate setting of the through output of the clock signal and the data. As shown in FIG. 7(1), when the S terminal is set to L (low) and the output of the normal slew rate is set, the rising and falling slopes of the waveforms of the clock signal and the data (voltage change per unit time) Amount) is large to some extent. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, when the S terminal is set to H (high) and the output of the low slew rate is set, the clock signal and the The slope of rising and falling of the data waveform becomes gentle.

Generally, in order to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate, it is better to keep the slew rate low, and it is better to set the output at the low slew rate shown in FIG. 7(2). On the other hand, in order to ensure resistance to noise, it is better that the rising and falling slopes of the waveform are large, and it is better to set the normal slew rate output as shown in FIG. 7(1).

Note that the setting of the S terminal is not limited to simply setting the clock signal output from the CLK/O terminal and the through output waveform of the data output from the DATA/O terminal, but the clock signal and DATA input from the CLK/I terminal. It has a function of compensating the output waveform for the data input from the /I terminal. That is, generally, the clock signal and data output from the effect control CPU 120 or the like are output as a rectangular wave at the output stage, but reach the CLK/I terminal and the DATA/I terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. When the transmission loss due to the wiring is large until then, a clock signal or data having a waveform that is not the original rectangular wave may be input. In this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion circuit does not simply output the input clock signal or data as it is, but instead inputs the clock signal or data in a state in which the original rectangular wave is distorted. Has a function of compensating and outputting a waveform close to the original rectangular wave. In this case, if the output of the normal slew rate is set by the setting of the S terminal, the output signal is compensated for a waveform with a large rising or falling slope, and the output signal is closer to the original rectangular wave. Can be output, and the influence of external noise can be reduced. However, if the rising or falling slope is large as described above, the amount of voltage change instantaneously increases, and thus radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate may increase. On the other hand, if the output of the low slew rate is set by setting the S terminal, the waveform is compensated and output with a smaller rising or falling slope. Although it is weak against the influence of noise, it is possible to reduce the amount of instantaneous voltage change and suppress the increase of radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate.

The function itself for compensating the output waveform may be set to be valid or invalid, and all the functions for compensating the output waveform may be invalid. Further, the function of compensating the output waveform may be realized outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit by providing an amplifier circuit or the like outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit.

Further, in the above normal slew rate output setting, compensation is made so that the rising and falling slopes of the output waveform are larger than the rising and falling slopes of the input waveform. The output setting may be such that the input waveform is output as it is without compensating the output waveform (that is, the output waveform having a rising edge equivalent to the rising edge of the input waveform is used as the predetermined mode). In this case, in the low slew rate output setting, a waveform whose slope is smaller than the rising edge of the input waveform may be output.

The T terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the timeout reset function of the signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. Setting the T terminal to L (low) sets the timeout reset function to the invalid state, and setting the terminal to H (high) sets the timeout reset function to the valid state.

When the T terminal is set to H (high) and the timeout reset function is set to the valid state, the clock signal and data are input from the CLK/I terminal and the DATA/I terminal, and the signal output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. After the start, when a predetermined period (1 second in this example) has elapsed, it is considered that the time-out has occurred, and the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are automatically reset (output is stopped). Therefore, when the time-out reset function is set to the valid state, if it is desired to continuously supply a signal to each LED or operation motor from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, for example, from the effect control CPU 120 for at least a predetermined period. It is necessary to repeatedly output the control signal every (1 second in this example).

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of rewriting the control signal every 10 ms, and when the output from each drive output terminal is continued, the effect control CPU 120 is executed every 10 ms. By repeatedly outputting the control signal from the serial-parallel conversion circuit to the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the output from each drive output terminal is continued even if the timeout reset function is set to the valid state.

The Q/S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the drive system of the signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. When the Q/S terminal is set to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs. Further, when the Q/S terminal is set to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be sink outputs.

The Q/I terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting whether or not to invert the output logic of the signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and output. When the Q/I terminal is set to L (low), the output logics of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be normally output without being inverted. When the Q/I terminal is set to H (high), the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted and output.

The R terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a current reference setting terminal. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the R terminal is connected to each of the drive output terminals A0 to A23 via a constant current circuit, and an external resistor having an arbitrary resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). By connecting a resistor, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 can be set within a predetermined range (for example, 4 mA to 20 mA).

The VP terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is an electrostatic protection terminal for protection. A power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal. That is, if the power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal, an overvoltage higher than the power supply voltage can be released. When a plurality of types of power supply voltages are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the power supply voltage with the higher voltage value may be connected to the VP terminal.

Next, the control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control data format. The basic control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit is composed of the common format shown in FIG. 8(1) and the basic format shown in FIG. 8(2).

As shown in FIG. 8(1), the common format is a 9-bit header (HD), a 4-bit device ID (ID), 5-bit decode addresses AD0 to AD4 (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and 1 It is composed of bit EX data. The EX data is for setting whether the control data format following the common format is the basic format or the extended format described later, and EX=0 is set in the basic format.

As shown in FIG. 8(2), the basic format includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. For example, when transmitting data for performing LED lighting control, by setting and transmitting 6-bit data in time series for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, the lighting control including the gradation control of the LED is performed. It can be performed.

Further, as the control data format, an extended format can be used instead of the basic format shown in FIG. 8(2). Specifically, if EX=1 is set in the common format shown in FIG. 8(1), the control data format following the common format becomes the extended format shown in FIG. 8(3).

As shown in FIG. 8C, the extended format includes 1-bit binary data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the extended format, the data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is composed of 1 bit, so that the control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit can be reduced. For example, in the case of driving and controlling the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 using the serial-parallel conversion circuit, gradation control and the like are performed unlike the case of performing lighting control of light emitting bodies such as LEDs. Since it is not necessary to perform this, it is effective to use the extended format as shown in FIG. 8(3).

Although the control data format used in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described with reference to FIG. 8, the control data format used in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has, for example, the common data shown in FIG. The format is different in that it includes 6-bit decode addresses AD0 to AD5. Further, for example, the basic format shown in FIG. 8B is different in that it is short because it is configured to include 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels. Further, for example, the extended format shown in FIG. 8C is different in that it is short because it is configured to include 1-bit binary data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels.

Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is configured to disperse the output timings of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 to achieve spectrum spread, prevent the generation of radiation noise, and suppress radio wave radiation. .. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining output timings of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. In this embodiment, the internal oscillation clock circuit built in the serial-parallel conversion circuit outputs a 6 MHz clock signal. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9, the 6 MHz internal clock signal is converted to a 1 MHz 6-phase clock signal. Drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, four channels of drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 form a group 1, four channels of drive output terminals Q4 to Q7 form a group 2, and drive output terminals Q8 to Q8. Group 3 is composed of 4 channels of Q11, group 4 is composed of 4 channels of drive output terminals Q12 to Q15, group 5 is composed of 4 channels of drive output terminals Q16 to Q19, and drive output terminals Q20 to Q23 of Group 6 is composed of 4 channels. Then, as shown in FIG. 9, the drive output terminals in the same group (for example, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 in the group 1) have the same signal output timing, but drive output terminals of different groups ( For example, the output timing is dispersed between the drive output terminal Q0 of group 1 and the drive output terminal Q4) of group 2.

In FIG. 9, the output timings of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit are described. However, in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, the internal clock signal of 6 MHz is changed to 1 MHz. Separated into three-phase clock signals, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are divided into three groups of four channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

Next, a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9 is used as the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b, the motor drive driver 412, and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c will be described. 10 to 12 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Of these, FIG. 10 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light-emitter drivers 411a and 411b for controlling the lighting of the board-side LEDs 9d and 9e. FIG. 11 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 412 for controlling the drive of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330. Further, FIG. 12 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for performing lighting control of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c.

First, a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b for controlling the lighting of the board-side LEDs 9d and 9e will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b for controlling the lighting of the panel-side LEDs 9d and 9e are realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, the address [02] is assigned to the light emitter driver 411a (see FIG. 24), and as shown in FIG. 10, the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD4 are assigned. Of these, AD1 is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V), AD0, AD2 to AD4 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is set to 00010(B)=[02]. ..

Note that FIG. 10 shows a mode of setting the decode address in the light emitter driver 411a, but since the address [03] is assigned to the light emitter driver 411b as described later (see FIG. 24). Of the terminals AD0 to AD4 for inputting the decode address, AD0 and AD1 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V), AD2 to AD4 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 00011 (B)=[03]. Will be set to.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and the data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3B, the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b for controlling the lighting of the board-side LEDs 9d and 9e are all mounted on the same light emitter control board 16C. Since the transmission of the control signal between the drivers is carried out on the same light emitter control board 16C (the transmission across the boards is not carried out), the noise resistance does not have to be so concerned. Therefore, the through output of the clock signal and the data is set to an output having a low through rate, so that the radio wave radiation from the substrate is rather suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 10, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10, both the Q/S terminal and the Q/I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q/S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q/I terminal is set to L (low). As a result, the output signals of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be normally output without being inverted.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ=15 MA.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10, the power supply voltage VCL (5V) is connected to the VP terminal and is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 5V or more.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are connected to the board-side LEDs 9d and 9e. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 10, for convenience, one light-emitting body is connected to each drive output terminal, but when a color LED is connected as a light-emitting body, it is used for RGB. The three terminals may be connected to one color LED, or one terminal may be connected to one single color LED if a single color LED is used as the light emitter. .. Further, for example, a plurality of single-color LEDs may be connected in series to one terminal.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10, the case where the light emitters are connected to all the terminals of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is shown, but the drive output terminals Q0 to Q0 are arranged according to the number and arrangement of the light emitters. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q23, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 412 for controlling the drive of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, the motor drive driver 412 for controlling the drive of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 is realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. It

As will be described later, in this embodiment, the address [04] is assigned to the motor drive driver 412 (see FIG. 24), and as shown in FIG. 11, the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5 are assigned. Of these, AD2 is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V), AD0, AD1, AD3 to AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is set to 000100(B)=[04]. ing.

In the example shown in FIG. 11, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and the data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3(1), since the control signal is not transmitted between the motor drive driver 412 and other drivers, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). The connection (set to L (low)) may be set so that the through output of the clock signal and the data becomes an output of a normal through rate.

In the example shown in FIG. 11, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11, both the Q/S terminal and the Q/I terminal are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V). That is, by setting the Q/S terminal to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be sink outputs, and the Q/I terminal is set to H (high). Thus, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted and output.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ=15 MA.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11, the power supply voltage VCC (5V) is connected to the VP terminal and is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 5V or more.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the four channel terminals of Q0 to Q3 of group 1 having the same output timing are connected to the first first effect motor 303. .. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the four channel terminals Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing are connected to the second second effect motor 330. In this embodiment, two operation motors, the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330, are controlled, and the terminals Q8 to Q11 of the group 3 are unnecessary. The terminal of Q11 is connected to the ground (GND).

As described above, in the case of the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, the output timings of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are dispersed by being divided into three groups of groups 1 to 3. If the output timing is different between the signals output to the same operation motor (in this example, the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330), the drive accuracy of the operation motor may not be maintained. There is. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, signals input to the same operating motor are connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group, and the driving accuracy of the operating motor is set in such a manner. It prevents the occurrence of the situation that cannot be maintained.

On the contrary, for example, when connecting to the board-side LEDs 9d and 9e described in FIG. 10, or when connecting to the top frame LED 9a, left frame LED 9b, and right frame LED 9c of FIG. Since the above problem of driving accuracy does not occur, even if the output timing is different between the signals output to the respective light emitters, there is not much trouble. Therefore, when connecting the output signal from the drive output terminal to a light emitting body such as an LED, it is not necessary to pay attention to the output timing.

Next, a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. It

As will be described later, in this embodiment, the address [07] is assigned to the light emitter driver 413a (see FIG. 25), and as shown in FIG. 12, the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5 are assigned. Among them, AD0 to AD2 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V), AD3 to AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is set to 000111(B)=[07]. ..

Note that FIG. 12 shows the setting of the decode address in the light emitter driver 413a, but since the address [08] is assigned to the light emitter driver 413b as described later (see FIG. 25). , Of the terminals AD0 to AD5 for decoding address input, AD3 is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V), AD0 to AD2, AD4 and AD5 are connected to ground (GND), and the decoding address is 001000(B)=[ 08] will be set. As will be described later, since the address [09] is assigned to the light emitter driver 413c (see FIG. 25), A0 and AD3 of the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5 are the power supply voltage VCC. It is connected to (5V), AD1, AD2, AD4 and AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is set to 00001 1 (B)=[09].

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the S terminal to L (low), the through output of the clock signal and the data is set to the output of the normal slew rate. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the light-emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c are on different light-emitter control boards 16D to 16F. Since the control signal is transmitted between the light-emitting body drivers mounted on different boards and mounted on different boards, the influence of noise is large. Therefore, by setting the through output of the clock signal and the data to the output of the normal through rate, the resistance to noise is ensured.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12, both the Q/S terminal and the Q/I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q/S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q/I terminal is set to L (low). As a result, the output signals of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are set to be normally output without being inverted.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ=15 MA.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12, the power supply voltage VDL (12V) is connected to the VP terminal. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 12, since the power supply voltage (VDL) of 12V and the power supply voltage (VCL, VCC) of 5V are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the higher voltage value of 12V is used. The power supply voltage VDL is connected to the V terminal and is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 12 V or more.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are connected to a plurality of light emitting bodies as the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 12, for convenience, one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal, or three light emitters (for example, single-color LEDs) that perform similar control are connected in series. However, when a color LED is connected as a light emitter, three terminals for RGB may be connected to one color LED.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 12, a case is shown in which the light emitting bodies are connected to all the terminals of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but the drive output terminals Q0 to Q0 are arranged according to the number and arrangement of the light emitting bodies. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q11, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, in this embodiment, the T terminals of the light emitter driver 411, the motor drive driver 412, and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c are set to H (high), and the timeout function is enabled. Is set to state. In this embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 120 controls to turn on the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, and the board side LEDs 9d and 9e in the effect control process process (see step S55) described later. It outputs a signal or outputs a control signal for driving and controlling the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330. However, since the time-out function is set to the effective state, the control signal The output signal from each drive output terminal is automatically reset after a lapse of a predetermined period (1 second in this example) by only outputting once, and lighting control and drive control cannot be continued. Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a control signal repeatedly at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) in, for example, an effect control process process (see step S55) described later. , Lighting control of the panel side LEDs 9d and 9e, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c is continuously executed, and the drive control of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 is continuously executed. It is controlled to do.

In this embodiment, the time-out function is set to the valid state as described above, and the light-emitter drivers 411a and 411b, the motor drive driver 412, and the light-emitters are emitted every predetermined period (1 second in this example). Since the outputs from the drive output terminals of the body drivers 413a to 413c are automatically stopped, for example, after the drive control of the first effect motor 303 or the second effect motor 330 is performed, Although the control for stopping the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 has been performed, the driving of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 does not stop due to missing signals or malfunctions. The first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 can be prevented from being burned.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the T terminal is uniformly set to H (high) and the time-out function is set to the valid state. Of course, the setting of the valid state and the invalid state of the timeout function may be selectively used depending on the application. For example, regarding the motor drive driver, the time-out function is set to the valid state from the viewpoint of preventing the burn-in of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330, while the board-side LEDs 9d and 9e, the top frame LED 9a, and the left frame LED 9b. Unlike the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330, there is no problem such as burn-in with respect to the light emitters such as the right frame LED 9c. Therefore, the T terminal is set to L (low) and the timeout function is disabled. It may be configured to be set to the state.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to continuously execute the lighting control and the drive control, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the control signal repeatedly at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) (specifically,). Shows the case where the control signal is rewritten every 10 ms and the control signal is repeatedly output), but it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, an output circuit (output IC) is provided separately from the effect control CPU 120 (may be provided on the effect control board 12 or may be provided on another board such as the effect control relay board 16A), and effect control. When the CPU 120 for output outputs the control signal once, the output circuit is configured to repeatedly output the control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) based on the control signal output once. May be.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V), the T terminal is physically set to H (high) on the hardware, and the time-out occurs. Although the case where the reset function is set to the valid state is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, by connecting the T terminal to the register for setting the T terminal and changing the set value of the register by the setting signal from the CPU 120 for effect control, whether the time-out function is enabled or disabled by software May be configured to be set.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value (10 kΩ in this example) is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND), and the drive output terminal Q0 The drive current value of all outputs of Q23 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 is set to 15 MA. Since there is also a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) having an internal reference resistance, the serial-parallel conversion circuit having such an internal reference resistance is used as a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver. It is also possible to use the internal reference resistor to set the internal reference resistor, but in general, the built-in reference resistor included in the serial-parallel conversion circuit has a fixed drive current value (for example, 20 mA fixed) or a large error (for example, Error ±30%). Therefore, in this embodiment, an external resistor is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND) to use an external reference resistor to set an appropriate drive current value (15 MA in this example), and An error is also suggested (error ±3% in this example).

A serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) that can use both the internal reference resistor and the external reference resistor is used as the light emitter driver or the motor drive driver, and is configured to be used properly according to the application. May be. For example, when a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs are densely provided for the purpose of performance, if the light emission is sparse, the performance will be hindered. Therefore, an external reference resistor should be used to reduce the error. You may comprise. On the other hand, when performing the lighting control of the LED that is used independently for error notification, since there is no such obstacle in the production and a slight error may be large, the internal reference resistor is used. Good.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the electrical components (in this example, the board-side LEDs 9d and 9e, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, and the movable portion 302 for operating the first part) are operated. The control means (in this example, the CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 for operating the movable member 321 and the control signal by the serial communication method from the control means. Accordingly, output means (in the present example, light emitter drivers 411a and 411b,) for outputting a specific signal (in this example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11) for driving the electric component, A motor drive driver 412 and light emitter drivers 413a to 413c) are provided. The output means outputs the input control signal to the other output means in a first output state (in this example, a normal output state) in which the waveform rises in a change mode that is equal to or more than the input control signal. Slew rate output state) and a second output state (in this example, low slew rate output state) in which the waveform rises in a mode that changes more slowly than the first output state. In this example, setting the S terminal to L (low) sets the output to the normal slew rate, and setting the S terminal to H (high) sets the output to the low slew rate. Therefore, it is possible to change the setting according to the usage environment, and it is possible to suppress the radio wave emission from the substrate according to the setting, while improving the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction. Specifically, setting a low slew rate output state can suppress radio wave radiation from the board, and setting a normal slew rate output state can improve noise immunity of control signals for preventing malfunction. ..

Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (in this example, as shown in FIG. 3B, a plurality of output means are provided on the light emitter control board 16C). The light emitter drivers 411a and 411b are mounted, and control signals are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b on the same light emitter control board 16C). Then, in this case, the output means is set to the second output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 10, the S terminals are not provided in the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b mounted on the light emitter control board 16C. It is set to H (high) and is set to a low slew rate output state. Therefore, when another output unit is provided in the same substrate, radio wave emission from the substrate can be suppressed.

Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) ( In this example, as shown in FIG. 4, the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 16D to 16F, respectively, and the light emission drivers mounted on the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F have different control signals. It is sequentially transmitted between the body drivers 413a to 413c). Then, in this case, the output unit is set to the first output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 12, in the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F, S is set. The terminal is set to L (low) and is set to the normal slew rate output state). Therefore, when another output unit is provided on another substrate connected via the wiring member, noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be enhanced.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the circuit board generally has high noise resistance, in the connection relation within the circuit board, the suppression of radio wave radiation is prioritized and set to the low slew rate output state to provide a gentle signal waveform. On the contrary, since the wiring members (for example, flexible cable and wire harness) connected between the boards have low noise resistance, the rectangular wave is used as the normal slew rate output state by prioritizing the noise resistance in the isolation relationship between the circuit boards. The signal waveform is close to. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction while suppressing the radio wave emission to the outside of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V) or the ground (GND), and the S terminal is physically H level. It shows the case where it is set to (high) and is set to a low slew rate output state, and is set to L (low) and is set to a normal slew rate output state. I can't stop. For example, by connecting the S terminal to the register for setting the S terminal and changing the set value of the register in response to a setting signal from the CPU 120 for effect control, the output state of the low slew rate is set by software or the normal slew rate is set. Alternatively, it may be configured to set whether or not to output.

Further, in this embodiment, a control signal is transmitted between output means (emitter driver in this example) mounted on the same board by a low slew rate output state, or output means mounted on different boards. A case is shown in which a board (in this example, the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F) on which only one of the control signal transmissions according to the normal slew rate output state is performed is provided. I can't stop. For example, in the case where a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on one light emitter control board, among the light emitter drivers, a control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board. And a device that transmits a control signal to a light emitter driver mounted on another light emitter control board may be mixed. In this case, for example, even if a light emitter driver mounted on the same light emitter control board is used for transmitting a control signal between the light emitter drivers, set it to a low slew rate output state, and A device that outputs a control signal to the light-emitter driver mounted on the control board may be configured to be set to a normal slew rate output state.

Further, even when transmitting a control signal between the light emitting body drivers mounted on the same light emitting body control board, the output state is not necessarily set to a low slew rate. When the control signal output from one mounted light emitter driver is branched on the board, the output state may be set to a normal slew rate. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification example in which a control signal output from one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitter control board is branched on the board.

In Modification 1 shown in FIG. 13, a control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one light emitter driver 413d mounted on the light emitter control board 16G is branched on the board, and one of the branched signals is branched. The case where the control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413e on the same light emitter control board 16G and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413f on the same light emitter control board 16G is shown. As shown in the modified example 1, even on the same light emitter control board 16G, when the control signal is branched and transmitted to the other light emitter drivers 413e and 413f, the control signal is attenuated by the branch. Are more susceptible to noise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13, the S terminal may be set to L (low) so as to be set to an output state of a normal slew rate to enhance noise resistance of the control signal.

That is, in the case where a plurality of other output means provided in the same substrate as the output means are connected in parallel to the output means (in this example, as in the modification 1 shown in FIG. 13, the light emitter control board). A control signal (through output of a clock signal and data) output from one light emitter driver 413d mounted on 16G is branched on the board, and one of the branched control signals is the same emitter on the control board 16G. When the other control signal that is transmitted to the driver 413e and is branched is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413f on the same light emitter control board 16G), the output means is set to the first output state (in this example, the output unit is set to the first output state). , The S terminal is set to L (low) in the light emitter driver 413d mounted on the light emitter control board 16G to set a normal slew rate output state, as in Modification 1 shown in FIG. 13). It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased.

In the modified example 2 shown in FIG. 13, a control signal (clock signal and through output of data) output by one light emitter driver 413g mounted on the light emitter control board 16H is branched on the board, and one of the branched ones is branched. The control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413h on the same light emitter control board 16H, and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver (not shown) on the external light emitter control board (not shown). The case is shown. Even if the other branched control signal is transmitted to the external board as shown in the second modification, the control signal is attenuated by the branch and is easily affected by noise as in the first modification. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13, the S terminal may be set to L (low) so as to be set to an output state of a normal slew rate to enhance noise resistance of the control signal. With this configuration, the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased.

That is, a plurality of other output means provided on each of the first board provided with the output means and the second board connected to the first board via the wiring member are connected in parallel to the output means. In this case (in this example, as in the second modification shown in FIG. 13, a control signal (through output of clock signal and data) output by one light emitter driver 413g mounted on the light emitter control board 16H. On the substrate, one of the branched control signals is transmitted to the luminous body driver 413h on the same luminous body control board 16H, and the other branched control signal is on the external luminous body control board (not shown). When the light is transmitted to the light emitter driver (not shown), the output means is set to the first output state (in this example, as in the second modification shown in FIG. 13, the light emitter control board 16H). In the light emitting body driver 413g mounted on the upper side, the S terminal is set to L (low) and is set to a normal slew rate output state). With this configuration, the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased.

Further, according to this embodiment, the output means specifies from the specific signal output section (in this example, the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped into a plurality of different groups by the parallel communication method. A signal (in this example, the output signal from each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) is output (in this example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, one group as shown in FIG. 9). 6 groups of 4 channels each, and in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, each group is divided into 3 groups of 4 channels). Then, the output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (in this example, as shown in FIG. 9, the output timing of the output signal from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11 is the group. Are distributed by each). Therefore, the output timings of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 are dispersed to spread the spectrum, the generation of radiation noise can be prevented, and the radio wave radiation from the substrate can be further suppressed. ..

Further, according to this embodiment, the movable member (the movable portion 302 and the movable member 321 in this example) that performs the operation is provided. Further, the driving means for operating the movable member (in this example, the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330) are driven based on the specific signal output from the specific signal output unit of the same group of the output means. (In this example, as shown in FIG. 11, signals input to the same motor for operation are connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the driving accuracy of the driving unit while suppressing the radio wave emission from the substrate.

Further, according to this embodiment, the output unit has a stop function (in this example, a time-out function) that stops the output of the specific signal after a lapse of a predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) from the input of the control signal. (In this example, the timeout function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high). See FIG. 6.) Therefore, it is possible to avoid operation failure due to wiring failure and the like, and it is possible to stably control the electric component.

Further, according to this embodiment, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal is provided (in this example, the effect control CPU 120, for example, in the effect control process process (see step S55), By repeatedly outputting the control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example), the lighting control of the panel side LEDs 9d, 9e, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c is continuously executed, The drive control of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 is controlled so as to be continuously executed). Therefore, the control corresponding to the stop function of the output means can be realized.

Further, according to this embodiment, the output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (in this example, the timeout function is set to the invalid state by setting the T terminal to L (low)). , T terminals are set to H (high) to set the timeout function to the valid state (see FIG. 6). Therefore, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce the cost by sharing the parts.

In this embodiment, among the serial-parallel conversion circuits, the through outputs of the clock signal and the data are connected to the other serial-parallel conversion circuits in the same substrate, and the serial-parallel conversion circuits 411a and 411b, and for performance. Regarding the serial-parallel conversion circuit 412 to which the motors 303 and 330 are connected, the S terminal is set to H (high), and the through output of the clock signal and the data is set to the output of the low slew rate (FIGS. 10 and 11). Regarding the serial-parallel conversion circuits 413a, 413b, 413c whose through outputs of the clock signal and the data are connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit outside the board, the S terminal is set to L (low) and the clock signal and The case where the through output of data is set to the output of the normal slew rate (see FIG. 12) is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the through outputs of all the serial-parallel conversion circuits included in the gaming machine may be set to the normal slew rate output. Hereinafter, a modified example 3 in which the through outputs of all the serial-parallel conversion circuits are set to the outputs of the normal slew rate will be described.

14 and 15 are explanatory diagrams for explaining connection examples of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the third modification. As shown in FIG. 14, in the modified example 3, the S terminal is set to L (low) also in the serial-parallel conversion circuits 411a and 411b whose through outputs are connected to other serial-parallel conversion circuits in the same substrate. Then, the through output of the clock signal and the data is set to the output of the normal slew rate. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, in the modified example 3, also in the serial-parallel conversion circuit 412 to which the effect motors 303 and 330 are connected, the S terminal is set to L (low) and the clock signal and the data are passed through. Output is set to normal slew rate output. In Modification 3, serial-parallel conversion circuits 413a, 413b, and 413c in which the through output is connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit outside the board are similar to the connection mode shown in FIG. Set to slew rate output. Therefore, in the modified example 3 shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the through outputs are set to the normal slew rate outputs for all the serial-parallel conversion circuits included in the gaming machine.

According to the modified example 3 shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, all the serial-parallel conversion circuits are unified so that the through outputs are set to the outputs of the normal slew rate, so that the circuit settings are made common. Thus, design mistakes can be suppressed.

On the contrary, for example, the through outputs of all the serial-parallel conversion circuits included in the gaming machine may be set to the low slew rate output. Modification 4 in which the through outputs of all the serial-parallel conversion circuits are set to the low slew rate outputs will be described below.

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modified example 4. As shown in FIG. 16, in Modification 4, the S terminal is also set to H (high) in the serial-parallel conversion circuits 413a, 413b, and 413c whose through outputs are connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuits outside the substrate. The through output of the clock signal and the data is set to the low slew rate output. In Modification 4, serial-parallel conversion circuits 411a and 411b whose through outputs are connected to other serial-parallel conversion circuits in the same substrate are the same as the connection mode shown in FIG. Set to low slew rate output. Further, in the modified example 4, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 412 to which the effect motors 303 and 330 are connected is similar to the connection mode shown in FIG. 11, and the through output is set to the output of the low slew rate. Therefore, in Modification 3 shown in FIG. 16, through outputs are set to low slew rate outputs for all serial-parallel conversion circuits included in the gaming machine.

According to the modified example 4 shown in FIG. 16, all the serial-parallel conversion circuits are unified so that the through output is set to the low slew rate output. Can be suppressed.

If all the low slew rate outputs are set, it may be difficult to ensure resistance to noise when the through output is performed to the serial-parallel conversion circuit outside the board. In this case, a buffer circuit with a built-in amplifier may be provided between the through output and the output destination. With such a configuration, the through output is amplified by the amplifier incorporated in the buffer circuit, and it is possible to secure noise resistance to some extent even if the output has a low slew rate.

Further, in this embodiment, when the production motors 303 and 330 are connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the drive output terminals of the groups having the same output timing are connected (see FIG. 11). However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when a full-color LED is used as the light-emitting body, the drive terminals of the groups having the same output timing may be connected to the three terminals (RGB terminals) of the same full-color LED. Hereinafter, a modified example 5 in which the drive output terminals of the groups having the same output timing for the full-color LEDs are connected will be described.

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modified example 5. As shown in FIG. 17, in the modification 5, one of the three output terminals Q0 to Q2 among the four channel terminals of Q0 to Q3 of the group 1 having the same output timing among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11. The R terminal, G terminal, and B terminal of the full-color LED of the eye are respectively connected. In addition, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the three terminals Q4 to Q6 among the four channel terminals Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing are the R terminal and the G terminal of the second full-color LED. And B terminals are connected respectively. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the four terminals of the four channels Q8 to Q11 of the group 3 having the same output timing, the three terminals Q8 to Q10 are the R terminal and the G terminal of the third full-color LED. And B terminals are connected respectively.

According to the modified example 5 shown in FIG. 17, regarding the signals input to the same full-color LED, by connecting to the drive output terminals belonging to the same group, the light emission accuracy of the full-color LED can be secured.

Since the number of terminals required to connect the full-color LED is 3 terminals (R terminal, G terminal, and B terminal), as shown in FIG. 17, each of the four terminals of group 1, group 2 and group 3 is One of the terminals is unnecessary for connection (Q3 terminal, Q7 terminal, and Q11 terminal in the example shown in FIG. 17). In this case, terminals such as the Q3 terminal and the Q7 terminal shown in FIG. 17 which are unnecessary for connecting the full-color LED may be connected to the ground (GND).

Further, a terminal unnecessary for connecting the full-color LED may be used for other purposes. For example, when the movable member for production (production effect object) is configured to be operated by driving the solenoid, the solenoid for the effect operation object can be connected with one terminal, so Q11 shown in FIG. As shown in, the solenoid 500 for the performance product may be connected to a terminal unnecessary for connecting the full-color LED.

In addition, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of movable members (production effects) for production, when the production effects provided symmetrically in the game area are operated in some manner in synchronization with each other, You may comprise so that the solenoids for the production effects provided symmetrically may be connected to the drive output terminals of the same group. According to this structure, it is possible to secure the motion accuracy of the movable members that are synchronously operated, such as the symmetrically provided effect character.

Further, for example, when a solenoid for a performance product is provided, a predetermined power control IC may be connected between the drive terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit and the lock solenoid for the performance product. .. In this case, the predetermined power control IC is a power switch that outputs electric power from the output terminal side only when a high voltage higher than a predetermined value is input to the input terminal side (so-called high side switch, and the input side is a serial switch). -Connected to the drive terminal of the parallel conversion circuit, the output side is connected to the lock solenoid for the performance effect, and, for example, when a plurality of solenoids for the performance effect are provided, a high voltage for those performance effects is provided. The input side of the side switch may be connected to the drive terminals of the same group, and the high side switch and the lock solenoid for the director may be controlled by signals from the drive terminals of the same group. Further, for example, in the same group, a high side switch is connected to terminals (Q3 terminal, Q7 terminal, and Q11 terminal in this example) that are not necessary for connection of the full-color LED, and a production character object is provided on the output side of the high side switch. It may be configured to connect a lock solenoid for the.

Further, for example, when performing lighting control of a 7-segment LED or a dot display device, the inputs to the 7-segment LED or the dot display device are configured to be connected to the drive terminals of the same group, and a signal for the lighting control is supplied. The output timing may be adjusted.

In addition, if there are unused terminals in the drive output terminals of the serial-parallel conversion circuit and if these unused terminals are left unconnected, surge voltage will be input to these unused terminals due to factors such as static electricity. , There is a risk of causing problems such as excessive heat generation and damage to internal circuits. Therefore, it is conceivable to provide a protection circuit for the surge voltage countermeasure inside the serial-parallel conversion circuit, but this is not preferable because the manufacturing cost of the serial-parallel conversion circuit increases. Therefore, these unused terminals are configured to be connected to a predetermined reference potential so that the surge voltage escapes to the reference potential side of a predetermined power supply board (not shown), which causes excessive heat generation and damage to the internal circuit. It may be configured to suppress the occurrence of troubles such as. Modification 6 in which an unused terminal of the drive output terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the ground (GND) as a reference potential will be described below.

18 to 20 are explanatory diagrams for describing connection examples of the serial-parallel conversion circuit according to the sixth modification. Of these, FIG. 18 shows a modification of the connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b for controlling the lighting of the board-side LEDs 9d and 9e. In the example shown in FIG. 18, the panel LED is connected to 18 drive output terminals Q0 to Q17 out of the 24 drive output terminals Q0 to Q24, but the 6 drive output terminals Q18 to Q23 are unused. The unused terminals of the six drive output terminals Q18 to Q23 are connected to the ground (GND).

FIG. 19 shows a modification of the connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 412 for controlling the drive of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330. In the example shown in FIG. 19, each drive motor is connected to eight drive output terminals Q0 to Q7 out of twelve drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but four drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 are not connected. It is a used terminal, and the unused terminals of the four drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 are connected to the ground (GND).

20 shows a modification of the connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c. In the example shown in FIG. 20, the LEDs for each frame are connected to the nine drive output terminals Q0 to Q8 out of the 12 drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but the three drive output terminals Q9 to Q11 are It is an unused terminal, and the unused terminals of the three drive output terminals Q9 to Q11 are connected to the ground (GND).

According to the modified example 6 shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, even if a surge voltage is generated, the surge voltage can be released to the ground (GND) side, which causes a problem such as excessive heat generation or damage to the internal circuit. Can be suppressed.

In Modification 6 shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, an external resistance of 3 kΩ is further connected to each of the VP terminals which are electrostatic protection terminals for protection. By configuring the external resistance to be connected to the VP terminal in this way, even if a surge voltage occurs, it is possible to prevent a current higher than the rated current from flowing to the VP terminal, thereby causing excessive heat generation and damage to the internal circuit. It is possible to further suppress the occurrence of such problems.

Further, in the modified example 6 shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the case where the unused terminal is connected to the ground (GND) as the reference potential is shown, but the invention is not limited to such a mode, and it may be connected to another fixed potential. You may comprise. Modification 7 will be described below in which an unused terminal of the drive output terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to a fixed potential as a reference potential.

21 to 23 are explanatory diagrams for describing connection examples of the serial-parallel conversion circuit in the modified example 7. Of these, FIG. 21 shows a modification of the connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 411a and 411b for controlling the lighting of the board-side LEDs 9d and 9e. In the example shown in FIG. 21, the board side LED is connected to 18 drive output terminals Q0 to Q17 out of the 24 drive output terminals Q0 to Q24, but the 6 drive output terminals Q18 to Q23 are unused. The unused terminals of the six drive output terminals Q18 to Q23 are connected to VCL (5V) as a fixed potential (connected to the same power supply voltage as the VP terminal).

FIG. 22 shows a modification of the connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 412 for controlling the drive of the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330. In the example shown in FIG. 22, each performance motor is connected to eight drive output terminals Q0 to Q7 out of the twelve drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but four drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 are not connected. It is a used terminal, and unused terminals of the four drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 are connected to VCC (5V) as a fixed potential (connected to the same power supply voltage as the VP terminal).

FIG. 23 shows a modification of the connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c. In the example shown in FIG. 23, the LEDs for each frame are connected to the nine drive output terminals Q0 to Q8 out of the 12 drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, but the three drive output terminals Q9 to Q11 are It is an unused terminal, and the unused terminals of the three drive output terminals Q9 to Q11 are connected to VDL (12V) as a fixed potential (connected to the same power supply voltage as the VP terminal).

According to the modified example 7 shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, even if a surge voltage occurs, the surge voltage can be released to the fixed potential (VCL (5V), VCC (5V), VDL (12V)) side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects such as excessive heat generation and damage to the internal circuit.

Further, also in the modified example 7 shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, an external resistance of 3 kΩ is further connected to each of the VP terminals which are electrostatic protection terminals for protection. By configuring the external resistance to be connected to the VP terminal in this way, even if a surge voltage occurs, it is possible to prevent a current higher than the rated current from flowing to the VP terminal, thereby causing excessive heat generation and damage to the internal circuit. It is possible to further suppress the occurrence of such problems.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, the unused terminals are connected to the same power supply voltage as that of the VP terminals, but the invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, regardless of the power supply voltage connected to the VP terminal, the unused terminals can be uniformly connected to VDL (12V) so that the surge voltage can be released by connecting to a sufficiently high power supply voltage. It may be configured. Further, for example, a power supply voltage for surge voltage countermeasure may be provided, and the unused terminals may be uniformly connected to the power source voltage for surge voltage countermeasure.

In this embodiment, addresses are assigned in advance to the respective light emitter drivers 411a, 411b, 413a to 413c and the motor drive driver 412. 24 and 25 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of addresses given to the respective light emitter drivers 411a, 411b, 413a to 413c and the motor drive driver 412.

In this embodiment, in the effect control board 12, addresses of the respective light emitter drivers 411a, 411b, 413a to 413c and the motor drive driver 412 shown in FIGS. The address management table in which is set is stored. Then, as described above, by setting the connection state of each of the light emitter drivers 411a, 411b, 413a to 413c and the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD4 (or AD0 to AD5) of the motor drive driver 412 in advance, The assigned address is set, and the address managed on the side of the effect control board 12 using the address management table matches the address actually set in each driver.

In this embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the top frame LEDs 9a to 9c and the board-side LEDs 9d and 9e, the ROM 121 is provided with the address of the light emitter driver corresponding to the light emission target LED. The read address is read from a predetermined address storage area, the read address is set to the set bit of the decode address of the control data format shown in FIG. 8 (see FIG. 8(1)), and the control data having that address set is set for each light emitter driver. By outputting to 411a, 411b, 413a-413c, light emission control of top frame LED9a-9c and board side LED9d, 9e is performed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 controls the drive of the effect motors 303 and 330, the address of the motor drive driver 412 corresponding to the effect motors 303 and 330 is set to a predetermined address storage area provided in the ROM 121. The read address is set in the set bit of the decode address of the control data format shown in FIG. 8 (see FIG. 8(1)), and the control data in which the address is set is output to the motor drive driver 412. Drive control of the production motors 303 and 330 is performed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the addresses (in this example, addresses [00], [01], [05], [06], etc.) not set in the address management tables shown in FIGS. 24 and 25. Does not output control data (except in the case of malfunction due to garbled data).

In this embodiment, the addresses [00] and [01] are unused addresses. The address [02] is given to the light emitter driver 411a, and the address [03] is given to the light emitter driver 411b. The address [04] is given to the motor drive driver 412.

Further, the addresses [05] and [06] are unused addresses. The address [07] is given to the light emitter driver 413a, the address [08] is given to the light emitter driver 413b, and the address [09] is given to the light emitter driver 413c.

Further, as described above, the light emitter driver 411a having the address [02] and the light emitter driver 411b having the address [03] are configured by the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit and convert the serial data. It is converted into parallel data and supplied to the 24 board side LEDs 9d and 9e of the game board 2, respectively.

Further, as already described, the motor drive driver 412 having the address [04] is configured by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, converts serial data into parallel data, and drives the first effect motor 303. It outputs from the four output terminals (Q0 to Q3) as a drive signal for driving, and from the four output terminals (Q4 to Q7) as a drive signal for driving the second effect motor 330. In this embodiment, the output terminal numbers 08 to 23 of the area corresponding to the address [04] in the predetermined address storage area are unused areas.

Further, as described above, the light emitter driver 413a having the address [07], the light emitter driver 413b having the address [08], and the light emitter driver 413c having the address [09] have 12 channels. The serial-to-parallel converter circuit converts serial data into parallel data, and supplies the parallel data to the twelve top frame LEDs 9a, the left frame LEDs 9b, and the right frame LEDs 9c, respectively. In this embodiment, the output terminal numbers 12 to 23 of the areas corresponding to the addresses [07] to [09] of the predetermined address storage area are unused areas.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in this embodiment, the address information is set in a range of a predetermined value or more exceeding the minimum value among the values in the predetermined settable range for a plurality of electric components. .. Specifically, in this embodiment, a plurality of electric components (in this example, the board-side LEDs 9d and 9e, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, and the first effect for rotating the movable portion 302). The minimum value (in this example, the address [in this example, the address [in this example] that can be given to each light-emitting driver or motor-driving driver that outputs control data to the motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 for sliding the movable member 321). 00]) is not immediately assigned, but is configured to be given from a predetermined value (address [02] in this example) or more that exceeds the minimum value, and an address that is less than the predetermined value from the minimum value. (In this example, addresses [00] to [01]) are configured to be unused addresses.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in this embodiment, the address information is discontinuously set in at least a part of the plurality of electric components within a predetermined settable range. Specifically, in this embodiment, a plurality of electric components (in this example, the board-side LEDs 9d and 9e, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, and the first effect for rotating the movable portion 302). Of the addresses that can be given to the respective light emitter drivers and motor drive drivers that output control data to the motor 303 for driving and the second effect motor 330) for sliding the movable member 321, actually drive each light emitter driver and motor. It is configured such that the addresses given to the driver are discontinuous (in this example, addresses [05] to [06] are unused addresses, and addresses [04] to [07] ] Has been discontinuous until)).

As described above, in this embodiment, addresses are provided so as to be discontinuous, or addresses are provided from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value, so that unspecified addresses are included. Even if the control data is sent, as long as the address is not set for any driver, there is no risk of erroneously outputting a signal to any electrical component such as an LED or motor. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a malfunction will occur in the control of the electric component when the address information of the data is defective.

In addition, in general, when the number of LEDs and effect motors is changed at the development stage of a game machine, or when there is a change such as integration or abolition of boards to be used, each driver such as a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver is changed. On the other hand, it is necessary to reallocate the address, which may reduce the development efficiency of the gaming machine. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the addresses are provided so as to be discontinuous, or the addresses are provided from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value, so that it is unnecessary in the development stage. Even if a new driver occurs, the address assigned to the driver that is no longer needed will be treated as a missing number so that addresses will not be reassigned. Address allocation (for example, addresses [00], [01], [05], [06] shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25) can eliminate the need for address re-allocation and can be used at the development stage. The cost can be reduced and the development efficiency can be improved.

It should be noted that the method of allocating addresses to the respective light emitter drivers 411a, 411b, 413a to 413c and the motor drive driver 412 is not limited to the modes shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, and various modes are conceivable.

For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the case where addresses [00] and [01] are assigned as unused addresses to the drivers from the addresses [02] and above is shown, but only the address [00] is not added. You may comprise so that each driver may be given as a use address from address [01] or more. Further, the number of unused addresses may be further increased, and for example, addresses [00] to [02] may be given to each driver from addresses [03] and above as unused addresses.

Further, for example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the case where the addresses [05] and [06] are unused and the addresses are discontinuous is shown. However, only the address [05] is unused and the addresses are not used. It may be configured to be discontinuous, or the number of unused addresses may be increased, and for example, addresses [05] to [07] may be used as unused addresses to discontinue the addresses. ..

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit (in this example, the motor drive driver 412 and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c) and the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit (in this example, , The light emitter drivers 411a and 411b) are managed by using one table, but the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit and the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit use different tables. The address management may be performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the addresses are assigned so as to be discontinuous or the addresses are assigned from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value is shown only for the address allocation. Regarding the output terminal number of the driver, the output terminal number may be set to be discontinuous, or the output terminal number may be set from a predetermined value exceeding the minimum value. For example, with respect to the light emitter driver 411a set to the address [02], the output terminal numbers [00] and [01] are set as unused terminal numbers, and the output terminal number [02] is set to each LED. Alternatively, the output terminal numbers [05] and [06] on the way may be set as unused terminal numbers, and the output terminal numbers set for the LEDs may be discontinuous.

[Pachinko machine operation]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 makes necessary initialization after setting interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, the RAM 102 is cleared, for example. In addition, register setting of CTC (counter/timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, the interrupt is permitted and then the loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed and then the loop process may be entered.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 37. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 37 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, and the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (S11). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (S13). ).

Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (S14). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit (not shown) is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the In order to perform the control of the display operation on the 2 special symbol display device 4B and the opening/closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7, various processes are selected and executed.

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (S16). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process to determine the variable display mode of the normal symbol by using the random value MR4 for the general symbol display result determination, and the display operation in the normal symbol display device 20 (for example, lighting of the segment LED). , Etc. are controlled to enable the variable display of the normal symbol and the tilting motion setting of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (S17). As an example of these, in the command control processing, among the output ports included in the I/O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit, the effect After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command to the control board 12, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal to turn on the production control INT signal for the predetermined time. Then, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by turning it off. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after setting the interrupt enable state.

38 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in S15 shown in FIG. 37 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S21). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of S22 to S29 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit.

In the start winning determination process, it is first determined whether or not there is a first starting prize or a second starting prize by the first starting mouth switch 22A or the second starting mouth switch 22B, and if there is a prize, a special figure display A random number value MR1 for result determination, a random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are extracted, and in the case of the first start winning, an empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit In the case of the second starting prize, it is stored in the highest rank of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit.

The special symbol normal process of S22 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device, based on the presence or absence of pending data stored in the first special symbol holding storage unit and the second special symbol holding storage unit It is determined whether or not the special figure game by 4B is started. In the special symbol normal process, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result determination, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is "big hit", the variable display result is It is decided (predetermined) before it is displayed for derivation. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (big hit symbol or Any of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is predetermined.

The variation pattern setting process of S23 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected by using numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, based on a result of a preliminary determination as to whether or not the variation display result is a “big hit”. It includes processing to determine whether or not. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2".

By the special symbol normal process of S22 and the variation pattern setting process of S23, the variation pattern including the variation display time of the fixed special symbol or the special symbol and the effect symbol which is the variation display result of the special symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal process and the variation pattern setting process, using the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, special symbols and effect symbols It includes a process of determining the variable display mode of.

The special symbol variation process of S24 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol fluctuation processing, the processing which does the setting in order to change the special symbol in the 1st special symbol indicator 4A and the 2nd special symbol indicator 4B, and the elapsed time after that special symbol starts varying It includes the process of measuring. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop process of S25 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). It includes a process for making settings for the setting. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section is turned on. Then, when the big hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The big hit opening preprocessing of S26 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., there is processing to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and set the big winning opening to the open state. include. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The big hit opening process in S27 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". ..

The post-big hit opening process of S28 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the maximum winning opening maximum number of times, reached the maximum winning opening maximum value In this case, a process for making settings for transmitting a big hit end designation command is included. When the number of executions of the round does not reach the maximum winning opening maximum number, the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum winning opening maximum reaches the maximum, The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

The big hit ending process of S29 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit ending process, the big hit game state is ended by a production device such as the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, the board side LEDs 9d and 9e, and the movable member 321. The process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending production is executed as the production operation to be informed, and various settings for starting the probability variation control and the time saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state ( It includes processing for setting the probability change flag and the time saving flag). When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

In the jackpot ending process, the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is read to identify whether the jackpot type is "non-probable variation jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot". .. Then, when it is determined that the specified jackpot type is not the "non-probability variation jackpot", the setting (probability variation flag setting) for starting the probability variation control is performed. If the specified jackpot type is "non-probable variation jackpot", the setting for starting the time saving control (setting of the time saving flag and the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed during the time saving control is performed in advance). The predetermined count initial value (“100” in this embodiment) is set in the hour/hour counter.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control is performed (S51).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable-member running-in process of performing a running-in operation of moving the movable member 321 (S51A). The movable member break-in process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the operation of a plurality of types of movement patterns of the movable member 321 in the effect such as the notice effect, or detects the initial position of the movable member 321 by the position detection sensor 333 (the first embodiment in the present embodiment. The movable member initialization process of detecting the (position) or moving the movable member 321 to the initial position is executed (S51B).

After that, the CPU 120 for effect control shifts to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (ON) in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53) and executes the following process.

First, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S54). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which production control command is stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an error notification process, which is one of the processes for executing an error effect (S54A). In the error notification process of step S54A, for example, in response to the error designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100, the operation of displaying an error image in the display area of the effect display device 5, the error sound from the speakers 8L, 8R. The output operation, error notification by the error light emitting operation in the LEDs 9a to 9e, and the like are performed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (S55). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes according to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

Next, an effect random number updating process for updating the count value of the counter for generating an effect random number such as a jackpot symbol random number is executed (S56), and then the process proceeds to S52.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the production control process process (S55) in the production control main process. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold display notice effect determination process that determines the presence/absence of the hold display notice effect and the display pattern of the hold storage display (S71), and then the effect display device 5 performs. A hold display update process is executed to update the hold storage display in the first hold display area 5D and the second hold display area 5U to a display according to the stored contents of the start winning award reception command buffer (S72).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of S73 to S79 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

Fluctuating pattern command reception waiting process (S73): It is confirmed whether a changing pattern command is received from the game controlling microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start processing (S74).

Production symbol variation start processing (S74): control is performed so that variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect symbol (S75). In this embodiment, in the effect symbol variation start process, an effect execution setting process for performing LED control described later is also executed.

Production symbol variation process (S75): The switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) that constitutes the variation pattern is controlled, and the end of the variation time is monitored. Then, when the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (S76).

Production symbol fluctuation stop process (S76): Based on the receipt of the production control command (symbol confirmation command) for instructing the stop of all symbols, the control of deriving and displaying the variation of the production symbol and deriving the display result (stop symbol) To do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S77) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S73).

Big hit display processing (S77): After the variation time ends, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the big hit on the effect display device 5. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big hit game process (S78).

Big hit game processing (S78): The big hit game is controlled. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 and the like are performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit ending effect process (S79).

Big hit end effect processing (S79): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S73).

[Structure of production unit]
Next, the effect unit 300 will be described based on FIGS. 3 to 36. 3A is a front view showing the effect unit, and FIG. 3B is a rear view. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view showing a state where the effect unit is seen from diagonally behind. 29A is a front view showing a state in which the movable portion is in the tilted position, and FIG. 29B is a state in which the movable portion is in the standing position. FIG. 30: is a rear view which shows (A) a pinion gear and (B) a rack gear. 31A is a schematic diagram showing a state where the movable member is at the first position, and FIG. 31B is a schematic diagram showing a state where the movable member is at the second position. 33A is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the pinion gear meshes with the rack gear, FIG. 33B is a state in which the rack gear is moving, and FIG. 33C is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the rack gear is restricted. 34(A) to (D) are enlarged views of the main parts showing the state of the gears before reaching the restricted state. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram showing (A) a restricted state, (B) a state in which the pinion gear is changed to a deregulated state by rotating the pinion gear in the first operating direction, and (C) an initial driving state. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram showing (A) a regulation state, (B) a state in which the pinion gear is changed to the regulation release state by rotating the pinion gear in the second operation direction, and (C) a drive initial state.

As shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the effect unit 300 is provided between the game board 2 and the effect display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, and is a base portion 301 fixed at a predetermined position. A movable portion 302 rotatably provided with respect to the base portion 301, a tilted position where the movable portion 302 is tilted sideways (see FIG. 29A), and an upright position where it stands upright (FIG. 29 ( B)), and a first effect motor 303 that rotates between them.

A bearing hole 310 is formed through the base portion 301, and a guide groove 311 having an arc shape centered on the bearing hole 310 is formed around the bearing hole 310. At the lower right position of the bearing hole 310 on the back surface of the base portion 301, a first effecting motor 303 for rotating the movable portion 302 is fixedly installed on the back surface, and a drive that penetrates the base portion 301 and projects to the front side is formed. A rotary disk 312 is fixed to the tip of the shaft (not shown).

A shaft member 313 that faces the front-rear direction is projectingly provided at a predetermined position on the peripheral edge of the turntable 312, and a lower end of a link member 314 is rotatably supported by the shaft member 313. Further, a detection piece 315 is provided on the opposite side of the shaft member 313 in the peripheral edge of the turntable 312, and the detection piece 315 is detected by a position detection sensor 316 provided below the turntable 312. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the movable portion 302 is located at the tilted position.

The movable portion 302 includes a rotating member 320, a movable member 321 provided on the front side of the rotating member 320 so as to be slidable with respect to the rotating member 320, and a movable member on the rear side of the rotating member 320. 321 and a rack gear 322 that moves integrally. The movable member 321 is capable of reciprocating between a first position on the rotating shaft 325 side with respect to the rotating member 320 and a second position further away from the rotating shaft 325 than the first position.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable effect of moving the movable member 321 between the first position and the second position when the movable portion 302 is in the standing position. ing. Moreover, at least a part of the movable member 321 retreats below the display screen of the effect display device 5 when in the first position, and at least a part of the movable member 321 overlaps with the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5 in the second position. (See FIG. 1).

The rotating member 320 is formed of a substantially plate-shaped member extending in the left-right direction. The rotating member 320 is inserted into the bearing hole 310 from the rear side on the right side of the front surface so as to project on the rotating shaft 325 and the left side of the rotating shaft 325. The first guide shaft 326 that is inserted into the guide groove 311 from the rear side and the second guide shaft 327 that protrudes from the upper right of the rotating shaft 325 and is inserted into the guide groove 311 from the rear side are protruded. There is.

The upper end of the link member 314 is rotatably supported by the tip of the second guide shaft 327 that is inserted into the guide groove 311 and protrudes toward the front surface of the base portion 301. That is, the turntable 312 and the rotating member 320 are connected via the link member 314. Further, a coil spring 328 that constantly urges the rotating member 320 toward the standing position is provided on the outer periphery of the rotating shaft 325.

On the left side of the first guide shaft 326, a linear slide groove 329 that guides the movable member 321 in the left-right direction is provided extending in the left-right direction. A second effect motor 330 for sliding the movable member 321 is fixedly provided above the slide groove 329 on the front surface of the rotating member 320, and the drive shaft that penetrates the base portion 301 and projects to the rear side. A pinion gear 331 that operates the rack gear 322 is fixed to the tip of the 330a. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the second effect motor 330.

A hook 332 to which the left end of a tension spring 323 for urging the rack gear 322 is locked is provided on the rear surface on the left side of the rotating member 320 so as to project rearward. In addition, a position detection sensor 333 that detects a detection piece 334 formed at the right end of the rack gear 322 is provided on the back surface on the right side. By detecting the detection piece 334 by the position detection sensor 333, performance control is performed. The CPU 120 can identify that the movable member 321 is located at the first position.

The movable member 321 has a disc-shaped light emitting portion 321A and a mounting portion 321B extending rightward from the light emitting portion 321A. The light emitting unit 321A is provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) (not shown) inside and is capable of emitting light forward. Further, two bosses 334a, 334b are provided on the rear surface of the mounting portion 321B so as to project. The bosses 334a, 334b are inserted into the slide groove 329, and the rack gear 322 is screwed from the rear surface side by the screw N1. By fixing 322, the movable member 321 arranged on the front side of the rotating member 320 and the rack gear 322 arranged on the rear side of the rotating member 320 are integrated.

The movable member 321 and the rack gear 322, which are integrated with each other, are guided by the two bosses 334a and 334b inserted into the slide groove 329 so that the movable member 321 and the rack gear 322 can slide in the left-right direction with respect to the rotating member 320. Further, on the right side of the rack gear 322, a hook 335, which is locked at the right end of the tension spring 323 whose left end is locked by the hook 332 of the rotating member 320, is provided to project rearward. That is, the tension spring 323 has one end locked to the hook 332 of the rotating member 320 and the other end locked to the hook 335 of the rack gear 322, so that the movable member 321 is always directed toward the second position side. Energize.

In the rendering unit 300 configured as described above, the movable portion 302 is located at the tilted position as shown in FIG. 29A in the initial driving state. Then, when the turntable 312 is rotated clockwise in the front view by the first effect motor 303, the second guide shaft 327 is pulled downward by the link member 314, and the front view is centered on the rotation shaft 325. It rotates about 90 degrees clockwise and rotates to the standing position shown in FIG. In addition, since the biasing force of the coil spring 328 acts when rotating from the tilted position to the standing position, the load on the first effect motor 303 is reduced. Further, by driving the first effect motor 303 in the reverse direction, the first effect motor 303 is rotated from the standing position to the tilted position.

Next, detailed structures of the pinion gear 331 and the rack gear 322 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30(A), the pinion gear 331 is a rotary gear in which a plurality of drive teeth are projected on a part of the peripheral surface of the disk member. The drive teeth have a plurality of drive teeth 340A protruding in the direction of rotation, and a tooth thickness dimension L2 in a pitch circle having a radius from the drive shaft 330a to a position where the teeth are engaged with each other is larger than a tooth thickness dimension L1 of the drive tooth 340A. It has a large drive tooth 340B and a drive tooth 340C whose tooth thickness dimension L3 in the pitch circle is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1, L2 of the drive teeth 340A, 340B (tooth thickness dimension L1<L2<L3. ).

Further, since the tooth thickness dimensions L1, L2, L3 of the drive teeth 340A, 340B, 340C are different from each other in this way, the tip surface 342A of the drive tooth 340A, the tip surface 342B of the drive tooth 340B, and the tip surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C. The circumferential length dimension in each case is the same as the relationship between the tooth thickness dimensions L1, L2, and L3. That is, the circumferential length of the tip surface 342B is longer than the circumferential length of the tip surface 342A, and the circumferential length of the tip surface 342C is the circumferential direction of the tip surfaces 342A and 342B. It is longer than the length dimension of.

In the present embodiment, the front end surfaces 342A and 342B are flat surfaces, and the front end surface 342C that constitutes a restricting portion described later is a curved surface that follows an arc centered on the drive shaft 330a.

The tooth gap dimension L4 between each drive tooth 340A and the driving tooth 340A and the tooth gap dimension L5 between the driving tooth 340A and the driving tooth 340B are the same (tooth groove dimension L4=L5), and the driving tooth 340A The tooth space dimension L6 between the drive tooth 340C and the drive tooth 340C is longer than the tooth space dimension L4, L5 (L4, L5<L6). The drive teeth 340A, 340B, 340C are formed over about 1/3 of the peripheral surface, and the remaining 2/3 of the peripheral surface is a missing portion 341 in which the drive teeth are removed in the circumferential direction. There is. That is, the pinion gear 331 has, on the peripheral surface, a meshing portion having drive teeth and meshing with the rack gear 322, and a non-meshing portion having no drive teeth and not meshing with the rack gear 322.

In the present embodiment, in the pinion gear 331, the clockwise rotation in FIG. 30A is the first operation direction for moving the rack gear 322 from the second position to the first position, that is, the first direction, and is the counterclockwise direction. The circumference is the second operation direction that moves the rack gear 322 from the first position to the second position, that is, in the second direction.

As shown in FIG. 30(B), the rack gear 322 is a gear in which a plurality of driven teeth are projectingly provided on a part of the side surface of the rod-shaped member. The driven teeth include a plurality of driven teeth 350A protruding along the side surface on the side of the pinion gear 331, a driven tooth 350B having a tooth thickness dimension L12 at a position where the driving teeth mesh with each other, which is larger than a tooth thickness dimension L11 of the driven tooth 350A, and a tooth. The thickness dimension L13 has a driven tooth 350C longer than the tooth thickness dimension L11, L12 of the driven tooth 350A, 350B (tooth thickness dimension L11<L12<L13). Further, the tip surfaces of the driven teeth 350A, 350B, 350C are flat surfaces.

The tooth groove dimension L14 between each driven tooth 350A and the driven tooth 350A and the tooth groove dimension L15 between the driven tooth 350A and the driven tooth 350C are the same (tooth groove dimension L14=L15), and the driven tooth 350A. The tooth space dimension L16 between the driven tooth 350B and the driven tooth 350B is longer than the tooth space dimension L14, L15 (L14, L15<L16).

It should be noted that the tooth groove sizes L14 and L15 in the rack gear 322 correspond to the tooth thickness dimension L1 of the drive tooth 340A, and the tooth groove dimension L16 corresponds to the tooth thickness dimension L2 of the drive tooth 340B. .. Further, the tooth groove sizes L4 and L5 in the pinion gear 331 are set to correspond to the tooth thickness dimension L11 of the driven tooth 350A, and the tooth groove size L6 is set to correspond to the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 350C. ..

These driven teeth 350A, 350B, 350C are formed from the lower part of the side surface in the longitudinal direction to the substantially center in the up-down direction, and the upper part from the center is a missing portion 351 in which the driven tooth is missing in the longitudinal direction. That is, the rack gear 322 has, on its side surface, a meshing portion having driven teeth and meshing with the pinion gear 331, and a non-meshing portion having no driven teeth and not meshing with the pinion gear 331.

In the present embodiment, rack gear 322 moves between the upper second position and the lower first position in FIG. 30(B). That is, the pinion gear 331 rotates in the first operating direction to move from the second position to the first position, that is, the first direction, and the pinion gear 331 rotates in the second operating direction to move from the first position to the second position. It is adapted to move to the position, that is, the second direction.

Next, operation modes of the pinion gear 331 and the rack gear 322 will be described based on FIGS. 31 to 36. In the present embodiment, since the movable member 321 reciprocates between the first position and the second position when the movable portion 302 is in the upright position, the movable portion 302 is in the upright position below. The description will be made based on the up, down, left, and right directions.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the movable member 321 reciprocates between the first position and the second position when the movable portion 302 is in the upright position will be described, but the movable portion 302 is in the tilted position. The movable member 321 may reciprocate between the first position and the second position at this time or during rotation.

As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the movable member 321 (rack gear 322) has a lower first position where the boss 334 b is located at the lower end of the slide groove 329 with respect to the rotating member 320. The boss 334a is capable of reciprocating in the vertical direction between the boss 334a and a second upper position located at the upper end of the slide groove 329.

As shown in FIG. 31(A), in the movable member 321, the upward biasing force of the tension spring 323 acts at the first position, but the pinion gear 331 and the rack gear 322 cause the drive teeth 340C to be described later. The tip end of the driven tooth 350C of the tip end surface 342C of the second contact changes to a restricted state (locked state) in which the upward movement of the movable member 321 due to the biasing force of the tension spring 323 is restricted, whereby the second effect is produced. The movable member 321 is held at the first position even when the motor 330 is off. The details of the restricted state (locked state) will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 31B, when the restricted state is released, the movable member 321 moves upward by the urging force of the tension spring 323, and then is held at the second position by the tension spring 323. That is, the biasing force of the tension spring 323 exceeds the load of the movable member 321.

Next, as shown in FIG. 33(A), with the driving tooth 340B meshing with the corresponding driven tooth 350B from above, as shown in FIG. 33(B), the pinion gear 331 rotates in the first operating direction. As a result, the drive tooth 340A meshes with the corresponding driven tooth 350A, and the rack gear 322 moves in the first direction (downward) against the upward biasing force of the tension spring 323. Then, as shown in FIG. 33(C), the tooth tip of the driven tooth 350C comes into contact with the tip end surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C, and the rack gear 322, that is, the movable member 321 is held at the first position. It

Here, details when changing from the regulation release state to the regulation state (lock state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 33(A), when the movable member 321 is in the second position, the pinion gear 331 rotates in the first operating direction so that the drive teeth 340A, 340B mesh with the driven teeth 350A, 350B. Thereby, the rack gear 322 moves in the first direction against the upward biasing force of the tension spring 323, and the movable member 321 descends toward the first position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 34(A), before the disengagement of the drive tooth 340A adjacent to the drive tooth 340C among the plurality of teeth and the driven tooth 350A adjacent to the driven tooth 350C among the plurality of teeth, the drive tooth 340C is released. And the driven tooth 350C are engaged with each other, and the engagement between the drive tooth 340A and the driven tooth 350A is released. Then, as shown in FIG. 34(B), after the driving tooth 340C faces the missing portion 351 of the rack gear 322, the tooth tip of the driving tooth 340C moves from the tooth root of the tooth surface of the driven tooth 350C to the tooth tip. I will do it.

Then, as shown in FIG. 34(C), when the tip of the drive tooth 340C moves away from the tooth surface of the driven tooth 350C by the rotation of the pinion gear 331, the engagement between the drive tooth 340C and the driven tooth 350C is released. That is, the drive tooth 340C is an adjacent drive tooth adjacent to the missing portion 341, and the driven tooth 350C is an adjacent driven tooth adjacent to the missing portion 351 (the drive tooth 340C is the rear of the plurality of driven teeth in the first direction). Since it is a drive tooth that meshes with the driven tooth 350C on the side end), the transmission of power for moving the rack gear 322 in the first direction is interrupted by the meshing of the following driving tooth and the driven tooth, so that the rotation of the pinion gear 331 is stopped. As a result, the tooth tip of the drive tooth 340C moves away from the tooth surface of the driven tooth 350C, and when the engagement between the drive tooth 340C and the driven tooth 350C is released, the rack gear 322 tries to move in the second direction by the urging force of the tension spring 323. To do.

Then, as shown in FIG. 34(C), when the pinion gear 331 further rotates, the tip end surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C intersects with the tip line T passing through the tips of the driven teeth 350A, 350B, 350C of the rack gear 322. To do. At this time, as described above, the transmission of the power for moving the rack gear 322 in the first direction is interrupted due to the meshing of the subsequent drive tooth and the driven tooth, so that the rack gear 322 is moved by the biasing force of the tension spring 323. Since the driven teeth 350C are moved in two directions, the tips of the driven teeth 350C abut against the tip surfaces 342C of the drive teeth 340C so as to be pressed against them.

As described above, the contact point S of the driven tooth 350C with respect to the drive tooth 340C moves from the tooth surface of the drive tooth 340C (see FIG. 34A) to the tip of the drive tooth 340C (see FIG. 34B). ), and moves to the tip surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C (see FIG. 34C). That is, the driving tooth 340C is transferred to the tip surface 342C so as to slide from the tooth surface of the driving tooth 340C toward the tooth tip while sliding.

After that, when the tip of the driven tooth 350C reaches the substantially central position in the circumferential direction on the tip surface 342C, the second effect motor 330 is turned off and the rotation of the pinion gear 331 is stopped (see FIG. 34(D)). .. In this state, the tip end surface 342C is arranged so as to be inclined toward the rack gear 322 side in the second direction so that the tip end surface 342C intersects the tip line T, and the rack gear 322 is directed upward by the biasing force of the tension spring 323. Since the driven teeth 350C are biased by being pressed, the tooth tips of the driven teeth 350C are pressed against the front end surface 342C, and a restricted state (locked state) in which the movement of the rack gear 322 in the second direction is restricted is achieved. That is, the drive teeth 340C and the driven teeth 350C form a restriction unit that restricts the movement of the rack gear 322 in the second direction (upward).

In addition, the pinion gear 331 is a gear that is rotated by the second effect motor 330, and the tip end surface 342C that configures the restriction portion is configured by a curved surface that follows an arc centered on the drive shaft 330a of the pinion gear 331. Then, as shown in FIG. 34(C), the contact point S of the driven tooth 350C with respect to the drive tooth 340C moves from the tooth surface of the drive tooth 340C to the tip surface 342C, and then reaches the position shown in FIG. 34(D). Even if the pinion gear 331 rotates, the contact point S between the driven tooth 350C and the tip end surface 342C does not displace in the second direction of the rack gear 322. Therefore, the rack gear 322 slightly moves according to the rotation of the pinion gear 331, that is, the movable member 321. Can be prevented from slightly rising to give the player a feeling of strangeness.

For example, when the tip end surface 342C forming the regulation portion is a flat surface, as shown in FIG. 34C, the contact point S of the driven tooth 350C with respect to the drive tooth 340C changes from the tooth surface of the drive tooth 340C to the tip end surface 342C. After the movement, when the pinion gear 331 rotates to the position shown in FIG. 34D, the contact point S′ between the driven tooth 350C and the front end surface 342C is displaced in the second direction of the rack gear 322. Further, when the pinion gear 331 is rotated in the first operation direction to release the restricted state, the urging force of the tension spring 323 increases as compared with the case where the tip end surface 342C is a curved surface, so that the second effect The load on the motor 330 is increased. Therefore, it is preferable that the leading end surface 342C be configured as a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 330a of the pinion gear 331.

In the present embodiment, since the second effect motor 330 is a stepping motor, the drive tooth 340C is stopped at the regulation position shown in FIG. 34D depending on the number of steps (rotation angle) from the reference position. Although the rotation of the pinion gear 331 can be stopped, for example, a sensor for detecting that the drive tooth 340C is in the regulation position shown in FIG. 34(D) is provided, and the pinion gear 331 is detected based on the detection status from the sensor. The rotation may be stopped.

Further, the stop position for stopping the rotation of the pinion gear 331 when changing to the regulated state is set to, for example, a plurality of positions within the range where the driven teeth 350C come into contact with the tip end surface 342C, and stops at different positions every predetermined number of times. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the local deformation of the front end surface 342C due to abrasion due to repeated stoppage. In this case, for example, it is conceivable to extend the tip surface 342C in the circumferential direction of the lacking portion 341.

Next, a method of releasing the restricted state will be described. First, in the regulated state shown in FIG. 35(A), by rotating the pinion gear 331 in the first operating direction, the drive tooth 340C moves and the tooth tip of the driven tooth 350C separates from the tip end surface 342C, and the missing portion 341. Is opposed to the rack gear 322, and the intersection of the tip surface 342C and the tooth tip line T is released, whereby the regulation of the driven tooth 350C by the tip surface 342C is released, and the regulation state is changed to the regulation release state.

As shown in FIG. 35B, when the restriction is released, the rack gear 322 moves upward in the second direction by the tensile force of the tension spring 323, so that the movable member 321 moves from the first position to the second position. Move at high speed. Further, in the present embodiment, since the first position is the drive initial position, as shown in FIG. 35(C), the pinion gear 331 is rotated in the first operation direction even after changing to the regulation release state. When the drive tooth 340B reaches the position where it meshes with the driven tooth 350B, the second effect motor 330 is turned off to stop the rotation of the pinion gear 331.

Therefore, when the movable member 321 is moved from the second position to the first position, the pinion gear 331 is further rotated in the first operating direction so that the drive teeth 340B, 340A and the driven teeth 350B, 350A are meshed with each other. 322 can be moved in the first direction. In this way, the movable member 321 can be moved from the first position to the second position and can also be moved from the second position to the first position simply by rotating the pinion gear 331 in the first operation direction. The control load of the effect control CPU 120 that controls the second effect motor 330 can be reduced.

FIG. 36 shows another example of the method of releasing the restricted state. In the regulated state shown in FIG. 36(A), by rotating the pinion gear 331 in the second operating direction opposite to the first operating direction, the drive tooth 340C moves and the tooth tip of the driven tooth 350C moves from the tip surface 342C. The distal tooth surface 342C and the tooth tip line T are separated from each other, but the driven tooth 350C enters the tooth space between the driving tooth 340C and the driving tooth 340A, and as shown in FIG. Since the tooth surface of the tooth 350C comes into contact with the tooth surface of the drive tooth 340C, the movement of the rack gear 322 in the second direction by the tension spring 323 is restricted by the contact with the drive tooth 340C.

Therefore, by further rotating the pinion gear 331 in the second operation direction, the rack gear 322 can be raised by the rotation of the pinion gear 331. That is, as shown in FIG. 35, when the restricted state is released by rotating the pinion gear 331 in the first operating direction in the restricted state, the movable member 321 moves from the first position to the first position at a predetermined speed by the urging force of the tension spring 323. 36, the movable member 321 moves from the first position to the second position at an arbitrary speed when the restricted state is released by rotating the pinion gear 331 in the second operating direction in the restricted state as shown in FIG. Can be moved to a position.

Specifically, if the pinion gear 331 is rotated at a low speed, the movable member 321 can be moved at a low speed, and if the pinion gear 331 is rotated at a high speed, the movable member 321 can be raised at a high speed. Further, it is possible to raise in various modes such as stopping or moving up and down while raising.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the embodiment of the present invention, the pinion gear 331 and the pinion gear 331 as the drive gear rotated (actuated) by the second performance motor 330 as the drive source. The rack gear 322 as a driven gear meshed with the rack gear 322 is urged by a tension spring 323 in a second direction opposite to the first direction in which the pinion gear 331 moves (operates), and the pinion gear 331 is A drive tooth 340A, 340B, 340C is partially removed, and a tip surface 342C as a restricting portion provided at the tip of the drive tooth 340C as an adjacent drive tooth adjacent to the drive portion 341. After the engagement between the driving tooth 340C and the driven tooth 350C of the rack gear 322 is released, the driven tooth 350C abuts on the tip end surface 342C, thereby restricting the movement of the rack gear 322 in the second direction.

That is, when the engagement between the drive tooth 340C and the driven tooth 350C is released and the missing portion 341 faces the rack gear 322, the driven tooth 350C of the rack gear 322 biased in the second direction comes into contact with the tip surface 342C. Movement in the second direction is restricted. As described above, since the movement of the rack gear 322 in the second direction can be restricted by using the tip end surface 342C provided on the drive tooth 340C of the pinion gear 331, the movement of the rack gear 322 and the movable member 321 in the first direction can be restricted. It is possible to stop the operation of the rack gear 322 with a simple structure of the drive gear and the driven gear without increasing the number of parts by separately providing a regulation means for regulating the gear.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rack gear 322 that is a driven gear is biased in the second direction by the tension spring 323, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the driven gear is not a spring member. It may be biased in the second direction by the biasing means. Further, for example, when the movable portion 302 is provided upside down, the rack gear 322 is always urged downward (second direction) by the load of the movable member 321, so that the rack gear 322 is urged in the second direction by its own weight. Those that are done are also included.

Further, the pinion gear 331 is a gear rotated by the second effect motor 330, and the rack gear 322 is a first position (the position shown in FIG. 31(A)) and a second position (FIG. 31( (A position indicated by C), and the pinion gear 331 rotates in the first operating direction for operating the rack gear 322 in the first direction, so that the drive teeth 340A, 340B, 340C and the driven teeth 350A, After moving from the second position to the first position by meshing with 350B, 350C, the missing portions 341 face each other and the meshing of the drive teeth 340A, 340B, 340C and the driven teeth 350A, 350B, 350C is released, It is biased in the second direction by the tension spring 323, and operates from the first position to the second position.

In this way, since the rack gear 322 can be reciprocally operated only by rotating the pinion gear 331 in the first operation direction, the control load of the second effect motor 330 can be reduced.

Further, when the driven teeth 350C come into contact with the leading end surface 342C, the restricted state in which the movement of the rack gear 322 in the second direction is restricted causes the pinion gear 331 to move the rack gear 322 in the first direction as shown in FIG. It can be released by operating in the first operating direction or in the second operating direction opposite to the first operating direction as shown in FIG.

By doing so, if the restricted state is not released even if the pinion gear 331 is rotated in one of the first operating direction and the second operating direction, it is released by operating in the other direction, so the rack gear 322 is released. It becomes easy to avoid that the driven tooth 350C of the above is caught in the front end surface 342C and cannot move the rack gear 322.

Further, in the restricted state, the operation mode of the rack gear 322 is different depending on whether the pinion gear 331 is rotated in the first operation direction or the second operation direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35(B), when the pinion gear 331 is rotated in the first operating direction, the rack gear 322 is raised by the urging force of the tension spring 323, and as shown in FIG. 36(B). When the pinion gear 331 is rotated in the second operation direction, the rack gear 322 moves up according to the rotation of the pinion gear 331, so that the operation mode of the movable member 321 integrated with the rack gear 322 can be diversified.

Further, the tooth thickness dimension L3 of the drive tooth 340C is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1, L2 of the other drive teeth 340A, 340B (for example, tooth thickness dimension L1<L2<L3). By doing so, it is possible to prevent damage or the like due to the load applied to the drive tooth 340C when the driven tooth 350A, 350B, 350C is brought into a meshed state from a non-meshed state. Further, since the tooth thickness dimension L3 is widened, the front end surface 342C forming the regulation portion is also widened, and thus it becomes easy to regulate the driven tooth 350C.

The pinion gear 331 is a gear that is rotated by the second effect motor 330, and the tip end surface 342C that configures the restriction portion is configured by a curved surface that follows an arc centered on the drive shaft 330a of the pinion gear 331. Even if the pinion gear 331 rotates while the driven tooth 350C is in contact with the tip end surface 342C, the contact point S between the driven tooth 350C and the tip end surface 342C is not displaced in the moving direction of the rack gear 322. It is possible to prevent the rack gear 322 from slightly moving according to the rotation of the.

Further, in the driven tooth, the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 350C meshing with the drive tooth 340C is longer than the tooth thickness dimension L11, L12 of the other driven teeth 350B, 350C (tooth thickness dimension L11<L12. <L13> By doing so, it is possible to prevent damage or the like due to the load applied to the driven tooth 350C when the driven tooth 340C is brought into the meshed state from the non-meshed state. In addition, it is possible to prevent damage or the like due to a load applied by the force biased in the second direction while being in contact with the restriction portion.

[Cable of production unit]
26, 31, and 32, the rendering unit 300 is provided with a cable 361 that supplies electric power to the LEDs of the light emitting unit 321A of the movable member 321.

32A and 32B schematically show the side surfaces of FIG. 31A and FIG. 31B, respectively. Note that, in FIG. 32, the space between the movable member 321 and the rotating member 320 and the space between the rotating member 320 and the rack gear 322 are drawn wider for easier understanding, but in reality, they are shown in the drawing. Is narrower than.

As shown in FIG. 1, the cable 361 is moved from the connector 363 provided on the relay board from the effect control board 12 of the base portion 301 to the movable member 321 via the pressing member 364 of the cable 361 provided on the rotating member 320. Is connected to the connector 362 provided on the LED board on which the LED of the light emitting section 321A is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 32A, when the movable member 321 is in the standby state at the first position, the portion of the cable 361 between the pressing member 364 and the connector 362 is in a considerably bent state. ..

As shown in FIG. 32(B), when the movable member 321 is advanced to the second position, the portion of the cable 361 between the pressing member 364 and the connector 362 is extended and there is no margin. Become.

Therefore, a force in the direction from the second position to the first position is applied to the movable member 321 by the cable 361. In the extended state of the cable 361, the covering material of the cable 361 is resin, so that the force applied to the movable member 321 by the cable 361 in the cold state of the cable 361 is smaller than that in the unchilled state. Become stronger.

The tension spring 323 is pulled by the second effect motor 330 until the movable member 321 reaches the second position. Therefore, the second effect motor 330 can generate a force stronger than the tensile force (biasing force) of the tension spring 323 in the most pulled state.

As described above, the urging force of the tension spring 323 exceeds the load of the movable member 321. However, if the biasing force of the tension spring 323 is increased, the output of the second effect motor 330 that pulls the tension spring 323 also needs to be increased. Since a manufacturing cost increases when a motor having a large output is used, it is preferable that the output of the motor is a necessary minimum.

As the tension spring 323 in the present embodiment, not only the load of the movable member 321, but also the force of pulling the movable member 321 when the cable 361 is extended, and the cost of the second effect motor 330, A spring that provides the minimum required biasing force is used.

Therefore, if a cable 361 having poor quality is used and becomes hard at low temperature, it is considered that the biasing force of the tension spring 323 is insufficient when the movable member 321 is first moved. Normally, a cable that is harder than expected at low temperatures is not used.

However, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a situation in which the biasing force of the tension spring 323 becomes insufficient, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has been left and cooled at night is started, As shown in step S515 of 41, the running-in operation for running-in the movement of the movable member 321 is performed. By performing the running-in operation of moving the movable member 321 from the first position to the second position, the cable 361 is flexed and stretched, so that the cable 361 can be flexed-in. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation where the biasing force of the tension spring 323 is insufficient.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the cable 361 is of an object that emits heat (effect display device 5, first effect motor 303, and second effect motor 330). Since the cable 361 is provided in the vicinity, the cable 361 is kept in a highly flexible state by heat.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the movable member break-in process (S51A) in the effect control main process. With reference to FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 120 controls the first effect motor 303 to move the movable portion 302 to the standing position (S511).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an abnormality is detected during the movement of the movable portion 302 (S512). When it is determined that the abnormality is detected (YES in S512), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the abnormality of the movable portion 302 (S513). The notification is performed by the display on the effect display device 5 and the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation of stopping the notification has been performed by the clerk of the game store (S514). When it is determined that the movement abnormality of the movable portion 302 has not been detected (NO in S512) and the operation for stopping the notification has been performed (YES in S514), the effect control CPU 120 moves. The second effect motor 330 is controlled so as to move the member 321 to the first position (S515). Here, the movable member 321 may be reciprocated between the second position and the first position.

In this way, since the movable member is moved by the second effect motor 330 having a stronger force than the tension spring 323, the movable member 321 can be moved more reliably. As a result, the movement of the cable 361 and the movable member 321 can be accustomed to the state in which the cable 361 is extended from the bent state.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an abnormality is detected in the movement of the movable member 321 (S516). When it is determined that the abnormality is detected (YES in S516), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the abnormality of the movable member 321 (S517). The notification is performed by the display on the effect display device 5 and the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation of stopping the notification has been performed by the clerk of the game store (S518). When it is determined that the abnormality of the movement of the movable member 321 is not detected (NO in S516) and the operation for stopping the notification is performed (YES in S518), the effect control CPU 120 executes. The process to be performed is returned to the caller of this process.

Next, the control of the LEDs 9a to 9e will be described. The LEDs 9a to 9e are capable of emitting light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a plurality of types of light emission patterns corresponding to effects to be executed. When the control data is set in the control data area provided in the RAM 122, the effect control CPU 120 can control the LEDs 9a to 9e to emit light (light, blink, etc.) in a predetermined light emission pattern. ing.

The control data set in the control data area is data for controlling light emission (lighting, blinking, etc.) in each of the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F. Specifically, each light emission pattern is assigned an identifier for uniquely identifying them, and the control data described above is data indicating this identifier. When the control data is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 120 reads the control data and outputs it to each of the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F. In each of the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F, the LEDs 9a to 9e are turned on by controlling the light emitter drivers 411a, 411b, 413a to 413c to emit light in the light emission pattern identified by the identifier indicated by the control data. / It is driven off. On the other hand, when the control data area is NULL, it is determined that the control data is not set in the control data area. The timing at which the control data is set is a timing before the control is started by the control data or a timing before the control is started by the control data. In the following description, when describing an effect by any one of the LEDs 9a to 9e, it may be simply expressed as an LED effect.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of the control data area. The control data area includes at least one control data area and another control data area. Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, five control data areas of layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5 are included. And each layer respond|corresponds to the sound production which outputs a sound. For example, the “error” effect is an effect in which a screen indicating an error is displayed on the effect display device 5, but corresponds to an effect that outputs an error sound. It should be noted that the sound effect includes an effect (silent effect) in which no sound is produced, and there may be an LED effect corresponding to the silent effect. The LED effect corresponding to the silent effect is an effect of emitting light instead of turning off the LED.

Further, the priority order is set for the layer 1, the layer 2, the layer 3, the layer 4, and the layer 5, and the layer 1, the layer 2, the layer 3, the layer 4, and the layer 5 (the layer 1 is the highest in the order of the priority). The priority is low, and layer 5 has the highest priority). Here, "the priority order is set" specifically means that, when the effect control CPU 120 controls the LEDs 9a to 9e, the layers 5, layer 4, layer 3, layer 2, layer 1 are in this order. Control for determining whether or not the control data is set, and outputting the control data set in the control data area determined to be set to each of the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F Therefore, the priority is given to layer 5, layer 4, layer 3, layer 2, and layer 1 in this order. Note that the example of realizing the setting of the priority order is not limited to this, and for example, a value indicating the priority order may be assigned to each layer. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the values assigned to all the layers for which the control data is set, and (even when the control data is set for a plurality of layers) Then, the control data set in the layer to which the highest priority value (for example, the maximum value) is assigned is output to each of the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F.

In this way, since the priority order is set for the layers, only one LED effect is performed in the LED effect, and a plurality of LED effects are not simultaneously performed, but the sound effects corresponding to the LED effects are simultaneously performed. It may be done. For example, when the control data for BGM effect is set in the control data area of layer 1 and the control data for other effects is not set in the control data area of a layer having a higher priority than layer 1, the BGM effect is set. BGM is performed as a sound effect together with the LED effect of the effect. In this state, for example, when control data of another effect is set in the control data area of the layer 3, in the LED effect, the LED effect of the BGM effect ends and the LED effect of the other effect is performed. In the sound effect, BGM and sound effects of other effects are simultaneously performed.

When the control data is set in any one of the control data areas, the effect control CPU 120 emits (lights up) the LEDs 9a to 9e in a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set. , Blinking, etc.). Specifically, for example, when the game state is the low base state, as shown in FIG. 42, when the control data is set in the layer 1, it corresponds to the BGM effect (normal variation, reach variation) of the layer 1. The LEDs 9a to 9e are controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emission pattern. In addition, when the control data is set in the layer 2, the LEDs 9a to 9e are controlled to emit light (light, blink, etc.) in the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice B effect of the layer 2. When the control data is set in the layer 3, the LEDs 9a to 9e are controlled to emit light (light, blink, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notice A effect of the layer 3. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 4, the LEDs 9a to 9e are controlled to emit light (light, blink, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the confirmation notification effect of the layer 4. When the control data is set in the layer 5, the LEDs 9a to 9e are controlled to emit light (light, blink, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the error effect of the layer 5.

Further, when the gaming state is the high base state, as shown in FIG. 42, when the control data is set in the layer 1, the LED 9a has a light emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (normal fluctuation) of the layer 1. Control is performed so that 9e emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.). When the control data is set in the layer 2, the LEDs 9a to 9e are controlled to emit light (light, blink, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (reach variation) of the layer 2. In addition, when the control data is set in the layer 3, the LEDs 9a to 9e are controlled to emit light (light, blink, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notice effect (all) of the layer 3. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 4, the LEDs 9a to 9e are controlled to emit light (light, blink, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the confirmation notification effect of the layer 4. When the control data is set in the layer 5, the LEDs 9a to 9e are controlled to emit light (light, blink, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the error effect of the layer 5.

Further, when the game state is the big hit game state, as shown in FIG. 42, when the control data is set in the layer 1, the LED 9a to the LED 9a through the light emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect (big hit) of the layer 1 9e is controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). Further, when the control data is set in the layer 2, control is performed so that the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notice effect (holding sequence, promotion) of the layer 2. To do. When the control data is set in the layer 3, the LEDs 9a to 9e are controlled to emit light (light, blink, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the special winning opening winning effect of the layer 3. Further, when the control data is set in the layer 4, the LEDs 9a to 9e are controlled to emit light (light, blink, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the probability variation winning effect of the layer 4. When the control data is set in the layer 5, the LEDs 9a to 9e are controlled to emit light (light, blink, etc.) in a light emission pattern corresponding to the error effect of the layer 5.

When the control data is set in both of the control data areas, the effect control CPU 120 emits the LEDs 9a to 9e in a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area having a higher priority (lights up, It can be controlled so that it blinks). Specifically, for example, when the control data is set in both the control data areas of the layer 2 and the layer 3, the light emission pattern corresponding to the layer 3 which is the control data area having a high priority is set. The LEDs 9a to 9e can be controlled to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). Further, when the control data is set in the control data areas of the layers 2, 3, and 4, the LED 9a has the light emission pattern corresponding to the layer 4 which is the control data area having a higher priority. It is possible to control so that ~9e emits light (lights, blinks, etc.).

Further, in the present embodiment, a light emission pattern when control data is set in one control data area during the first game state, and one control during the second game state different from the first game state The emission pattern is different when the control data is set in the data area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42, the control data area is provided for each game state (low base state, high base state, big hit game state). Then, for example, a light emission pattern (light emission pattern corresponding to the notice A effect) when the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 2 in the low base state, for example, a high base state different from the low base state The light emission pattern (light emission pattern corresponding to the BGM effect) when the control data is set in the control data area of layer 2 is different.

The setting in the control data area shown in FIG. 42 is reset in principle every time one game ends. "One game", when the game state is low base state or high base state, indicates the game from the start of the variable display to the end by the stop display of the variable display, the game state of the jackpot game state The case shows a game from the start to the end of the big hit game state.

Therefore, when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, the control data is set at the start timing of the variable display or the start timing of the effect during the variable display, and is set for the stop display of the variable display or for each effect. It will be reset when the specified time has elapsed. Even if the timing when the time set for each effect has passed does not arrive, it is reset when the variable display is stopped and displayed.

When the gaming state is the big hit gaming state, the control data is set in the special figure hit waiting process in S173 or the big hit playing process in S176, and when the big hit ends, the round ends, or each It is reset at the timing when the time set for each performance has elapsed.

Exceptionally, the setting of the data for controlling the LED effect by the LEDs 9a to 9e corresponding to the effect (for example, the pre-reading notice effect or the effect including the multiple big hits) performed over a plurality of games is reset by the end of the game. It will not be done. It should be noted that the LED effect performed over a plurality of games is a combination of one game that is different depending on the above-mentioned game state and is once again a single game, and the effect over a plurality of this one game is also an LED effect. Good.

Next, each effect shown in FIG. 42 will be described. As described above, the LED control in the present embodiment corresponds to the sound effect in each effect shown in FIG. 42. In the following description, an LED that emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) is described in each effect, but only the described LED emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) and other LEDs also emit (lights, lights, blinks, etc.). Flashing).

In FIG. 42, the error effect corresponds to an error designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100, and an error image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 5 and an error sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. , LED 9a-9e is an effect in which an error is notified by an error light emitting operation or the like. The error effect in the present embodiment is an effect in which all of the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (light, blink, etc.). Then, as shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 120 does not depend on the gaming state when the control data is set in the control data area (layer 5) in which the highest priority is set. The control is performed so as to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emission pattern indicating an error effect.

The confirmation notification effect is an effect in which LEDs arranged in a V-shape are blinking or a V-shaped symbol is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5, and a big hit that is performed while the effect symbol is changing. It is an effect (announcement) that indicates confirmation.

In the probability variation winning presentation, for example, a V probability variation type gaming machine in which the state after the big hit is determined by the presence or absence of winning of the probability variation winning opening (or a predetermined area provided in the probability variation winning opening, hereinafter, probability variation winning opening, etc.) In the above, it is an effect performed when a prize is won in the probability variation winning port or the like. It is general that when the probability variation winning a prize or the like is won, the state after the big hit is a probability variation state, and when the probability variation winning a prize or the like is not awarded, the state after the big hit is a non-probability variation state. In this case, there is provided an effect that allows the player to aim at a probability variation winning opening or the like, and this effect is referred to as a probability variation challenge effect in the present embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is not provided with a probability variation winning port, but in order to explain an example of LED control, the probability variation winning effect in this embodiment is, for example, in a special variable winning ball device 7. The above-mentioned predetermined area is provided, and when the player wins the predetermined area, the LED (for example, the LED provided in the special variable winning ball device 7) emits light (lights, blinks, etc.). In the present embodiment, the probability variation challenge effect is an effect in which an LED (for example, an LED provided in the special variable winning ball device 7) emits light (lights, blinks, etc.). The probability variation winning port is also called a probability variation attacker.

In the present embodiment, the notice A effect and the notice B effect are effects in the display area of the effect display device 5 while the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.). The character A is an effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5, and the notice B effect is an effect in which the character B is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5. In addition, "notice (all)" indicates notice A effect and notice B effect. In addition, among the “preliminary notice (holding series, promotion)”, the notice (holding series) is a big hit holding when there is a big hit holding before or during the big hit. It is a production that gives a notice during a big hit. The notice (promotion) is the above-described big hit middle promotion effect, or the number-of-rounds promotion effect in which the number of big hit rounds increases from 8 rounds to 16 rounds, for example. This "advance notice (holding sequence, promotion)" is an effect in the display area of the effect display device 5 while the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (light, blink, etc.).

The special winning opening winning effect is an effect that is performed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is won. The special winning opening winning effect in the present embodiment is an effect in which the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) each time the special variable winning ball device 7 is won. In this special winning opening winning effect, an effect that is particularly noticeable at the time of so-called over winning may be performed.

In each of the effects described above, not only the LED effect, but also effects other than the LED effect (for example, sound effect by sound, display effect by effect display device 5, or effect in which sound effect and display effect are combined). Although it may be performed, in the following description, unless otherwise specified, "effect" indicates only the LED effect in the effect. When showing the entire effect including the LED effect and effects other than the LED, it is expressed as “effect (all)”. In addition, when an effect other than LED is shown, it is expressed as “effect (other than LED)”. For example, "BGM effect" indicates only LED effect, "BGM effect (all)" indicates the entire effect including effects other than LED such as sound effect, and "BGM effect (other than LED)". "Indicates effects other than LEDs, such as sound effects.

Further, in each of the effects described above, the priority of the BGM effect is set to be the lowest in any game state due to the nature of BGM. In the low base state, the notice A effect has a higher priority than the notice B effect because the notice A effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the notice B effect. Further, in the low base state, the confirmation notification effect has a higher priority than the notice A effect because the confirmation notification effect is an effect indicating that the big hit is confirmed.

In the high base state, the BGM (reach variation) effect has a higher priority than the BGM (normal) effect, but this is because the BGM (reach variation) effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the BGM (normal) effect. Is. In the high base state, the notice (all) effect has a higher priority than the BGM (reach variation) effect, but this is because the notice (all) effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the BGM (reach variation) effect. Is. In the high base state, the confirmation notification effect has a higher priority than the notice (all) effect, because the confirmation notification effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the notice (all) effect.

In the jackpot game state, the notice (holding series, promotion) performance has a higher priority than the BGM (big hitting) performance, but this is because the notice (holding series, promotion) is more important to the player than the BGM (big winning) performance. Because there is. In the jackpot gaming state, the big winning mouth prize presentation has a higher priority than the notice (holding series, promotion) production, but this is because the big winning mouth winning presentation is performed every time a prize is won. (Promotion) effects (other than LEDs) are generally effects that are performed in the display area of the effect display device 5 for a relatively longer time than the special winning opening winning effects. If the priority is set higher, the player can be notified of any of the effects, but if the priority of the notice (holding sequence, promotion) is set higher than that of the special winning opening prize, the notice ( This is because only the production of "Holding series, promotion" is performed and the special winning award winning presentation is not performed. In addition, as described above, in the big winning mouth prize presentation, the production at the time of over-winning is generally performed, and since the over-winning is a profit that cannot be obtained by the player, the importance of the production is high. It is also because it is expensive.

The setting of the control data of each effect is reset when the time set for each effect has passed, except for the BGM effect and the control data of the effect performed over a plurality of games. Note that, as an effect (all) in a general pachinko gaming machine, there is an effect (all) that branches into two or more effects (all). In the case of branching to such a plurality of effects (all), the control data of the corresponding effect is reset when branching.

The control data set in each control data area described above is an example, and is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 42, and is appropriately set according to the effect of the pachinko gaming machine or the like.

43 and 44 are time charts showing an example of LED control. First, in the time chart shown in FIG. 43, when the error notification is not executed, the game state is the low base state, the variable display is not performed, and there is no hold, there is a start winning prize at the time T1. , A production pattern starts to change, a notice B effect occurs at time T2, and a notice A effect occurs at time T3. The BGM effect (other than LED) is performed from time T1 to the end, the notice B effect (other than LED) is performed from time T2 to the end, and the notice A effect (other than LED) is performed from time T3 to the end. It is being appreciated. The control target LEDs are LEDs 9a to 9e as an example.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 43, the vertical axis represents LED control corresponding to each layer, and the horizontal axis represents time.

Also, in FIG. 43, the control data set in the control data area of layer 5 is used as the control data for the error effect, and the control data set in the control data area of the layer 4 is used for the control of the final notification effect. Data, control data set in the control data area of layer 3 is used as control data for the notice A effect, and control data set in control data area of layer 2 is used as control data for the notice B effect. The control data set in the control data area of layer 1 is used as the control data for BGM effect.

The LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) with color A in the error production, emit light with color B (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the final notification production, and emit light with color C (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the notice A production. Then, in the notice B effect, the color D is emitted (lighting, blinking, etc.), and in the BGM effect, the color E is emitted (lighting, blinking, etc.).

Further, the time chart shown in FIG. 43 shows a display mode showing the emission colors of the LEDs 9a to 9e. In this display mode, "off" indicates that the LEDs 9a to 9e are off, and the alphabet indicates that they emit light (light, blink, etc.) in the corresponding color. "Erase" and alphabetic expressions are also used in other time charts to be described.

Further, in the time chart shown in FIG. 43, it is also shown whether or not an effect (other than LED) corresponding to each layer is executed. For example, the BGM effect (all) is an effect that executes the sound effect together with the LED effect, so that the sound effect can be executed even when the LED effect is not executed because the priority is low.

Further, in the case of FIG. 43, each effect (other than LED) can be executed simultaneously. For example, the notice A effect (other than LED) and the notice B effect (other than LED) can be executed at the same time.

Based on the above, the time chart of FIG. 43 will be described. First, since the control data is not set in each control data area, the LEDs 9a to 9e are turned off as shown in the LED display mode.

At time T1, there is a start winning and the control data is set in the control data area of layer 1, so that the BGMLED control is turned on. As a result, as shown in the LED display mode, the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light of color E (lighting, blinking, etc.).

Next, at time T2, control data is set in the control data area of layer 2 having a higher priority than layer 1, so that the notice BLED control is turned on and the BGMLED control is turned off. As a result, the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light of color D (lighting, blinking, etc.) as shown in the LED display mode.

Next, at time T3, the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 3 having a higher priority than the layer 2, whereby the notice ALED control is turned on and the notice BLED control is turned off. As a result, as shown in the LED display mode, the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light of color C (lighting, blinking, etc.). According to the control shown in FIG. 43, the notice B effect important for the player is prioritized over the BGM effect, and the notice A effect important for the player is prioritized over the notice B effect. Since the visual effect can be given appropriately, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Next, in the time chart shown in FIG. 44, the game state is in the low base state, the variable display is not performed, and there is no hold, there is a start winning at time T1, and the effect symbol starts to change. As in the case of FIG. 43, the notice B effect is generated at time T2 and the notice A effect is further generated at time T3, but a time chart when the error notification is being executed is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 44, since the error notification is being executed, the error display (other than the LED) is being executed, and the control data is set in the control data area of the layer 5, so that the LED display mode is achieved. As shown in, the LEDs 9a to 9e emit light (light, blink, etc.) in the color A. Since the control data for error notification set in the layer 5 has the highest priority, it becomes the time T1, the time T2, and the time T3 at which the BGM effect, the notice B effect, and the notice A effect are generated. Also, the error LED control is continued and the execution of the error effect (other than the LED) is also continued.

As shown in FIG. 44, the BGM effect (other than LED), the notice B effect (other than LED), and the notice A effect (other than LED) can be executed at the same time even while the error notification is being executed.

43 and 44 show, as an example, an LED control example when the game state is the low base state, but also when the game state is the high base state or the big hit game state LED control is performed according to the priority order of the layers indicated by 42.

45 and 46 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect execution setting process executed in the effect symbol variation start process (step S74). In this flowchart, the control data area shown in FIG. 42 will be described as an example. Further, in the description of this flowchart, "setting the control data of the effect Y in the control data area of the layer N and setting the LED control data of the effect control pattern in accordance with the start timing of the effect Y" is simply referred to as "effect. The Y control data is set in the layer N”. For example, the description "set the control data of the notice effect in the layer 2" means "set the control data of the notice effect in the control data area of the layer 2 and change the effect control pattern according to the start timing of the notice effect. Setting the LED control data”.

In the effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the error LED is emitting light (for example, whether the LEDs 9a to 9e are emitting light of color A (lighting, blinking, etc.)). Perform (step S901). The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the error notification process of step S54A has been executed.

When the error LED is being emitted (step S901; Yes), the error effect has the highest priority, and therefore the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S915 without setting the control data in the lower layer.

When the error LED is emitting light (step S901; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the game state is the high base state (step S902). When the gaming state is the high base state (step S902; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is the reach variation pattern (step S903). When the variation pattern is the reach variation pattern (step S903; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the BGM (reach variation) effect control data in the layer 2 (step S904), and proceeds to step S906. When the variation pattern is not the reach variation pattern (step S903; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the BGM (normal variation) effect control data in layer 1 (step S905), and proceeds to step S906.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs an advance notice determination process for determining whether to execute the advance notice effect (step S906). Here, it is determined using a lottery process based on a variation pattern or a random number. For example, when the variation pattern indicates super reach α, β, it is determined by using a lottery process based on a random number. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the notice effect from the determination result of the notice determination process (step S907). If the notice effect is not executed (step S907; No), the process proceeds to step S909. When executing the notice effect (step S907; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data of the notice effect in the layer 3 (step S908).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a finalization notification determination process for determining whether to execute the finalization notification effect (step S909). Here, it is determined using a lottery process based on a variation pattern or a random number. For example, when the variation pattern indicates a big hit, it is determined by using a lottery process based on a random number. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the confirmation notification effect from the determination result of the confirmation notification determination process (step S910). When the confirmation notification effect is not executed (step S910; No), the process proceeds to step S912. When executing the confirmation notification effect (step S910; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data of the confirmation notification effect in the layer 4 (step S911). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects each effect control pattern determined in each determination process (step S912). Then, the effect execution setting process ends.

Returning to the processing of step S902, if the gaming state is the low base state (step S902; No), the process proceeds to step S913 of FIG. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern (step S913). When the variation pattern is the reach variation pattern (step S913; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the BGM (reach variation) effect control data in the layer 1 (step S914), and proceeds to step S916. When the variation pattern is not the reach variation pattern (step S913; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the BGM (normal variation) effect control data in the layer 1 (step S915), and proceeds to step S916.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the notice B determination process for determining whether to execute the notice B effect (step S916). Here, it is determined using a lottery process based on a variation pattern or a random number. For example, when the variation pattern indicates super reach α, β, it is determined by using a lottery process based on a random number. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the notice B effect from the determination result of the notice B determination process (step S917). When the notice B effect is not executed (step S917; No), the process proceeds to step S919. When executing the notice B effect (step S917; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice B effect control data in the layer 2 (step S918).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the notice A determination process for determining whether to execute the notice A effect (step S919). Here, it is determined using a lottery process based on a variation pattern or a random number. For example, when the variation pattern indicates super reach α, β, it is determined by using a lottery process based on a random number. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the notice A effect from the determination result of the notice A determination process (step S920). When the notice A effect is not executed (step S920; No), the process proceeds to step S922. When executing the notice A effect (step S920; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data of the notice A effect in the layer 3 (step S921).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a finalization notification determination process for determining whether to execute the finalization notification effect (step S922). Here, it is determined using a lottery process based on a variation pattern or a random number. For example, when the variation pattern indicates a big hit, it is determined by using a lottery process based on a random number. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the confirmation notification effect from the determination result of the confirmation notification determination process (step S923). When the confirmation notification effect is not executed (step S923; No), the process proceeds to step S912. When executing the confirmation notification effect (step S923; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data of the confirmation notification effect in the layer 4 (step S924).

In addition to the control of the LEDs 9a to 9e in the effect symbol variation start process described above, the control of the LEDs 9a to 9e is also performed in the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect symbol variation process, and the big hit game process. For example, in the variation pattern command reception waiting process, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the production control CPU 120 immediately displays the LEDs 9a to 9e in the LED mode in the customer waiting demonstration production. .. On the other hand, when the BGM effect is performing an effect in which a certain pattern is repeated, the effect control CPU 120 causes the LEDs 9a to 9e to be displayed in the LED mode in the customer waiting demonstration effect a few seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. In this way, even if the same customer waiting demo designation command is received, the control content differs depending on the situation.

Further, in the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LEDs 9a to 9e based on the start timing set in the effect symbol variation start process, and whether or not the time set for each effect has elapsed, When the variable display ends, the setting of the control data of the effect is reset. Further, in the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 120 may control the LEDs 9a to 9e according to the operation of the player. An example of a player's operation is, for example, a pressing operation of a trigger button of the stick controller 31A. In accordance with such a pressing operation, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LEDs 9a to 9e in the effect of changing the effect design. In the big hit game processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets the control data shown in FIG. 42 in the control data area to control the LEDs 9a to 9e, and the time set for each effect elapses. Then, the setting of the control data of the effect is reset. Also, in the big hit game processing, the LEDs 9a to 9e may be controlled according to the operation of the player, so the effect control CPU 120 controls the LEDs 9a to 9e according to the pressing operation.

As described above, in this embodiment, the data setting area (in this example, the control area shown in FIG. 42) having a plurality of layers (in this example, layer 1 to layer 5 shown in FIG. 42) in which the priority order is set. Data area). Further, it is possible to set light emission data for controlling light emission of at least the light emitters (LEDs 9a to 9e in this example) of the electric components in each layer of the data setting area. Then, the control means (in this example, the production control CPU 120) can control the light emission of the light emitter based on the light emission data, and the light emission data is set in a plurality of layers of the data setting area. In addition, the light emission control of the light emitter is performed based on the light emission data set in the layer having the higher priority. Therefore, the priority order can be easily switched by switching the layers to control the light emission of the light emitter.

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of light emission patterns (for example, BGM effect, notice effect, confirmation notification effect, special winning opening prize effect, probability variation winning effect, error effect, etc.) (for example, BGM effect, notice effect, confirmation notification effect, etc.) A light emitting device (for example, LEDs 9a to 9e) capable of emitting light in a color pattern, a blinking pattern, and the like, and a control unit capable of controlling the light emitting device (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) are provided, and the control unit controls. When the control data is set in the control data area, the light emitting device can be controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern, and the control data area is one control data area (for example, the layer of FIG. 42). 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data areas, etc.) and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data areas At least one control data area different from one control data area) and one of the control data areas (for example, for controlling layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5) When the control data is set in any of the control data areas of the data area, the light emission pattern (for example, BGM effect, notice effect) corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set. , A confirmation notification effect, a big winning award winning effect, a probability variation winning effect, a light emitting pattern corresponding to an error effect, etc. are controlled to emit light, and both control data areas (for example, layer 1 and layer 2). , Control data areas are set in two control data areas of layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5), priority levels (for example, layer 1 , Layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5, etc.) can be controlled so that the light emitting device emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area that is set high, and during the first game state (for example, In the low base state of FIG. 42), one control data area (for example, the control data area of the layer 2 of the low base state of FIG. 42) has control data (for example, of the layer 2 of the low base state of FIG. 42). During the second game state (for example, the high base state in FIG. 42) different from the first game state and the light emission pattern when the notice B effect control data set in the control data area) is set. Control data in one control data area (for example, BGM effect control data set in the control data area of layer 2 in the high base state of FIG. 42). The light emission pattern when is set is different. Therefore, since the lamp effect can be performed in the priority order according to the game state, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of light emission patterns (for example, BGM effect, notice effect, confirmation notification effect, special winning opening prize effect, probability variation winning effect, error effect, etc.) (for example, BGM effect, notice effect, confirmation notification effect, etc.) A light emitting device (for example, LEDs 9a to 9e) capable of emitting light in a color pattern, a blinking pattern, and the like, and a control unit capable of controlling the light emitting device (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) are provided, and the control unit controls. When the control data is set in the control data area, the light emitting device can be controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern, and the control data area is one control data area (for example, the layer of FIG. 42). 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data areas, etc.) and other control data areas (for example, layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5 control data areas At least one control data area different from one control data area) and one of the control data areas (for example, for controlling layer 1, layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5) When the control data is set in any of the control data areas of the data area, the light emission pattern (for example, BGM effect, notice effect) corresponding to the control data area in which the control data is set. , A confirmation notification effect, a big winning award winning effect, a probability variation winning effect, a light emitting pattern corresponding to an error effect, etc. are controlled to emit light, and both control data areas (for example, layer 1 and layer 2). , Control data areas are set in two control data areas of layer 3, layer 4, and layer 5), priority levels (for example, layer 1 , Layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, layer 5, etc.) can be controlled so that the light emitting device emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the control data area in which the control data area is set high. A first data area (eg, a layer 1 control data area), a second data area (eg a layer 2 control data area), and a third data area (eg a layer 3 control order) A data area or the like is provided, and as the control data set in the second data area, control data for controlling the light emitting device to emit light (for example, an LED provided in the special variable winning ball device 7) is provided. Control data for controlling light emission) and light-off control data for controlling light emission device to be turned off. When control data (for example, BGM effect control data, etc.) is set to, the turn-off control data is set in the second data area, and when the turn-off control data is set, It is possible to set control data (for example, control data for a special winning opening winning effect) in the three data areas. Therefore, the light emission pattern having a high priority can be made conspicuous, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The description of the effect shown in FIGS. 43 to 46 is an example, and the effect shown in this embodiment may be applied to a state other than the gaming state shown in FIGS. 43 to 46. Specifically, for example, the game state shown in FIG. 43 is a low base state, but it may be applied to the big hit game state.

Further, although the effect in the control of the LEDs 9a to 9e described above is the sound effect, the effect is not limited to the sound effect, and may be an effect executed in the effect display device 5, an effect for operating the accessory, or the like. Although the number of layers is 5, the number of layers may be 2 or more. Furthermore, the setting data area is provided for each of the low base state, the high base state, and the big hit game state, but is not limited to this, and is provided for each of various states such as the low accurate high base state and the high accurate high base state. You may do it.

As the control data set in the control data area described above, the control data output to the lamp control board 14 is taken as an example. However, the address of the data indicating the light emission pattern or the 1-bit data indicating the on/off and the like. May be

When the address of the data indicating the light emission pattern is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the address set in the control data area and lamps the control data stored at the address. When the data is output to the control board 14 and the control data area is NULL, it is determined that the control data is not set.

When 1-bit data indicating ON/OFF is set in the control data area, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the control data area when “1” indicating ON is set in the control data area. When the control data indicating the light emission pattern of the effect is output to the lamp control board 14 and "0" indicating OFF is set in the control data area, it is determined that the control data is not set. Therefore, when “0” is set, the control data indicating the light emission pattern of the effect corresponding to the control data area is not output to the lamp control board 14, so that the lamp 9 does not emit light in the light emission pattern. Becomes

Moreover, although the embodiment according to the difference in color has been described as the light emission pattern of the lamp, the present invention is not limited to this, and a blinking pattern having different light emission intervals may be used. Further, specific examples of the colors A, B, C, D, and E include blue, yellow, green, red, gold, and rainbow, but light may be emitted in a plurality of colors.

In addition, in this embodiment, the control means sets the control data in the control data area in which the highest priority is set (for example, the control data area of layer 5 in FIG. 42). Controls to emit light in a light emission pattern indicating an error regardless of the game state. Therefore, the error can be appropriately notified.

Further, in this embodiment, first control data for causing the light emitting device to emit light in the first light emission pattern when set in the control data area (for example, control data for notice A effect of FIG. 42), There is second control data that causes the light emitting device to emit light in the second light emission pattern when set in the control data area, and in the one game state (for example, the low base state in FIG. 42), The first control data (for example, the control data for the notice A effect set in layer 3 in FIG. 42) is the second control data (for example, the control data for the notice B effect set in layer 2 in FIG. 42). In the gaming state different from the one gaming state (for example, the high base state of FIG. 42B) set in the control data area having higher priority than the first controlling data (for example, FIG. 42 ( The control data of the notice A effect set in layer 2 of B) is prioritized over the second control data (for example, the control data of the notice B effect set in layer 3 of FIG. 42B). Is set to a low control data area. Therefore, since the lamp effect can be performed in the priority order according to the game state, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Modified example of movable part drive mechanism]
Next, a modified example of the movable portion drive mechanism will be described. FIG. 47A to FIG. 47D are explanatory views showing a situation in which the movable portion drive mechanism is changed to the regulated state by the regulating means as the modified example 1. FIG. 48A to FIG. 48D are explanatory views showing a situation in which the movable portion drive mechanism is changed to the regulated state by the regulating means as the modified example 2. FIG. 49A to FIG. 49D are explanatory views showing a situation in which the movable portion drive mechanism is changed to the regulated state by the regulating means as the modified example 3. 50A is an explanatory view showing a restricting portion as a modified example 4 of the movable part drive mechanism, and FIG. 50B is a restricting part as a modified example 5 of the movable part drive mechanism.

In the above embodiment, the pinion gear 331 is applied as an example of the drive gear and the rack gear 322 is applied as an example of the driven gear, but the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the drive gear and the driven gear are not limited thereto. The type of can be variously changed.

For example, as in the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 47, both the drive gear G1 and the driven gear G2 are rotation gears, and the drive gear G1 is moved in the first operating direction as shown in FIGS. 47(A) to (D). By rotating, the driven tooth 410 is brought into contact with the tip end surface 402 of the drive tooth 400 adjacent to the missing portion 401 among the plurality of drive teeth, and the movement of the driven gear G2 in the second direction is regulated. can do.

In this way, a rotary gear may be applied as the driven gear. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 350C meshing with the drive tooth 340C as the adjacent driving tooth is made longer than the tooth thickness dimension L11, L12 of the other driven teeth 350B, 350C. However, the movable portion drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 410 meshing with the drive tooth 400 as the adjacent driving tooth is smaller than the tooth thickness dimension L11, 12 of the other driven tooth. Does not have to be long.

Further, as in the second modification shown in FIG. 48, the drive gear G3 is a rack gear and the driven gear G4 is a rotary gear, and the drive gear G3 is moved in the first operating direction as shown in FIGS. By moving the driven teeth 410 of the drive teeth 400 adjacent to the missing portion 401 of the plurality of drive teeth, the driven teeth 410 are brought into contact with each other, and the driven gear G4 is brought into a restricted state in which the driven gear G4 is restricted from moving in the second direction. be able to. In this way, a rack gear may be applied as the drive gear.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the tooth thickness dimension L3 of the drive tooth 340C as the adjacent drive tooth having the tip end surface 342C as the restriction portion is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1 and L2 of the other drive teeth 340A and 340B. However, the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the tooth thickness dimension L3 of the drive tooth 340C is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1 and L2 of the other drive teeth 340A and 340B. You don't have to.

Specifically, as in Modification 3 shown in FIG. 49, the drive gear G5 is a rotary gear, the driven gear G6 is a rack gear, and the drive gear G5 is a first gear as shown in FIGS. 49(A) to (D). By moving in the operating direction, the driven tooth 410 of the drive tooth 400 adjacent to the missing portion 401 among the plurality of drive teeth is brought into contact with the driven tooth 410, and movement of the driven gear G6 in the second direction is restricted. It can be regulated. In this way, the circumferential length dimension of the tip end surface 402 of the drive tooth 400 as the adjacent drive tooth need not necessarily be longer than the circumferential length dimension of the tip end surface of another drive tooth. As shown in FIG. 49(D), if the tip surface 402 crosses the tip line T, it is almost the same as or shorter than the circumferential length dimension of the tip surface of another drive tooth. Good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the tip end surface 342C as the restriction portion is a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 330a, but the movable portion drive mechanism is not limited to this, and for example, , A flat surface, a spherical surface, a concave surface, or the like. Further, as shown in Modification 4 of FIG. 50(A), the driven tooth 350C is formed by forming a locking recess 420 or the like capable of locking the driven tooth 350C on a part of the tip surface or the entire tip surface. Even if the driven tooth 350C slides on the tip surface 342C, the tooth tip of the driven tooth 350C is locked in the locking recess 420, so that the driven tooth 350C is easily gripped. It is possible to prevent the change from becoming difficult.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the tip end surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C adjacent to the missing portion 341 is applied as an example of the regulating portion, but the movable portion driving mechanism is not limited to this, and the regulating portion is not limited thereto. Is not limited to the one constituted by the tip surface of the drive tooth, and as shown in the modified example 5 of FIG. 50(B), the tip surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C and the missing portion from the tip surface 342C. It may be a regulation surface constituted by an extending surface 430 extending toward the 341 side. That is, the regulation portion is not limited to one formed only by the tip surface of the drive tooth, but may be formed by a portion that does not function as a drive tooth, such as an extended surface extending from the tip surface toward the missing portion. Good.

Further, the length dimension in the operating direction of the restriction surface including the distal end surface 342C and the extended surface 430 that form the restriction portion is not limited to that described in the above-described embodiment and modification, and may be, for example, The restricting surface such as the installation surface 430 may extend along the longitudinal direction of the missing portion 341.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modifications 1 to 4, the drive gear has the missing portion where the driving tooth is missing on the rear side of the adjacent driving tooth in the first operating direction. Is a portion where no drive gear is formed, for example, a gear in which drive teeth are formed only on the arc of a fan-shaped gear, or a rack gear in which adjacent drive teeth are formed at the rear end in the first operating direction, the missing portion. Will have.

Further, the driven gear also has a missing portion where the driven tooth is missing on the rear side in the first direction, but, for example, a gear in which the driven tooth is formed only in the arc of a fan-shaped gear or an adjacent drive tooth is used. A rack gear or the like in which the driven tooth that meshes with is formed at the rear end of the first direction also has a missing portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rack gear and the pinion gear are applied as the types of the drive gear and the driven gear, but the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and a spur gear, a bevel gear, and a helical gear, etc. May be applied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pinion gear 331 fixed to the drive shaft 330a of the second effect motor 330 is the drive gear, and the rack gear 322 integrated with the movable member 321 is the driven gear. The partial drive mechanism is not limited to this, and two gears that mesh with each other out of a plurality of gears driven by a drive source may be a drive gear and a driven gear. For example, a gear that directly or indirectly meshes with the pinion gear 331 may be a drive gear, and a gear that meshes with the drive gear may be a driven gear. Further, the movable member 321 may not be directly provided on the rack gear 322 that is a driven gear, and for example, the movable member 321 may be provided on a part of a power transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the rack gear 322.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the drive gear and the driven gear are applied as the drive mechanism for moving the movable member 321 between the rotating member 320 between the first position and the second position. For example, the drive gear and the driven gear of the present invention may be applied as a drive mechanism that drives the movable portion 302 between the tilted position and the upright position, or another movable member. You may apply as a drive mechanism of a production unit. Further, not only the one applied to the drive mechanism for driving the movable part for production in this way, but also the game mechanism movable such as a drive mechanism for opening and closing the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7, etc. You may apply as a drive mechanism of a part.

[Example of production using movable members]
Next, an example of performance using the movable member 321 will be described. FIG. 51 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 5 when the battle reach effect is executed. FIG. 52 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 5 when the story reach effect is executed.

The battle reach effect and the story reach effect are executed by the effect control CPU 120. Battle reach production and story reach production are multiple types of special reach productions (super reach) that are set to have a higher selection rate when the jackpot display result is obtained than the normal reach production called normal reach. Reach effect) is a specific super reach effect included in. Further, in these super reach productions, the jackpot expectation is set, for example, in the relationship of battle reach production <story reach production. In addition, the jackpot expectation degree between the battle reach effect and the story reach effect may be reversed.

Each of the battle reach effect and the story reach effect is an effect in which the effect display by the image display of the effect display device 5 and the effect operation of the movable member 321 are combined.

The battle reach effect shown in FIG. 51 will be described. In the variable display of the effect symbols, the variable display of the effect symbols is simultaneously started in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", for example, "left" and "right". According to a predetermined stop order such as "medium", the variable display of the effect symbols is sequentially stopped in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5R, 5C, and finally the effect symbols are stopped in all the effect symbol display areas. Then, when the display result is derived and displayed, the variable display ends.

After the variation display of the effect symbols is started at the same time, as shown in FIG. 51(A), when the left and right effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R are stopped, when the same symbol is stopped, the reach is reached. It becomes a state. The variable display until the timing when the reach state is reached is executed in the normal variable display effect mode in which the normal reach and the super reach do not differ. The normal reach and the super reach differ in the manner of effect after they have reached the reach state.

When the battle reach effect is executed as the reach effect, the effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are reduced as shown in FIG. 51(B). A small symbol display format is displayed and moved to the upper right corner of the screen, and a message image 53 with the words "Battle reach" is displayed in the center of the screen. This notifies that the battle reach effect will be executed.

In the battle reach effect, as shown in FIGS. 51(C) to (E), a video in which a teammate character 61 (player's teammate side) and an enemy character 62 (player's teammate side) compete (battle). A battle effect (an effect including output of sound effects during battle and music sound during battle) that displays an image is executed.

In the battle reach effect, when the variable display result becomes the big hit display result, a victory effect image display in which the teammate character 61 wins is displayed as shown in FIG. 51(E), and further, FIG. 51(D), (E). As shown, an image in which the particle effect image 71 is superimposed and displayed on the victory effect image is displayed, and the movable member 321 is moved to the standing position to execute the victory effect that appears in front of the display area of the effect display device 5. To be done.

On the other hand, in the battle reach effect, when the variable display result is a disappointing display result, a defeat effect is displayed in which an image in which the ally character 61 is defeated is displayed, and the particle effect image 71 as shown in FIGS. And the effect using the movable member 321 is not executed.

Specifically, in the match production, after the display in which the ally character 61 and the enemy character 62 appear appears as shown in FIG. 51(C), as shown in FIG. 51(D), the ally character 61 and the enemy character 62 appear. A moving image of a battle with 62 is displayed. For example, FIG. 51D shows a scene in which the ally character 61 attacks the enemy character 62. As shown in FIG. 51(D), in the battle production, in a scene where the teammate character 61 attacks (scene suggesting victory), a particle effect image as a production effect display is displayed in the lower central portion of the screen of the production display device 5. 71 is made to appear, and a particle effect effect is displayed to be superimposed on the victory effect display. When the teammate character 61 wins, as shown in FIG. 51(E), a victory effect is displayed in which an image capable of specifying that the teammate character 61 defeats the enemy character 62 and the teammate character 61 wins is executed. To be done. In the winning effect, as shown in FIG. 51(E), the movable member 321 moves to the standing position, so that the movable body motion effect that appears in the central region of the display area of the effect display device 5 is generated. To be done. Then, the appeared movable member 321 is caused to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 51(E), when the movable member 321 appears due to the movable body motion effect and moves to the standing position, the number of appearance display of the particle effect image 71 to be superimposed and displayed increases around the movable member 321. As a result, a moving image showing a display mode in which the display range of the particle effect image 71 is enlarged is displayed. The moving image is an effect that is executed using the particle effect image 71 in order to enhance the effect effect based on the operation of the movable member 321, and is called an operation effect effect. By such an action effect effect, an effect in which the operation mode of the movable member 321 and the display mode of the particle effect image 71 are related is executed. By performing such an effect, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display unit are linked.

Then, as shown in FIG. 51(F), the big hit display result (same symbol stop) is derived and displayed in the effect design that was displayed in the small symbol format, and the message image 55 with the words "Congratulations" is displayed. , Is displayed in the center of the screen as a reach result effect that is an effect indicating the result of the reach state. As a result, the fact that the player has won the battle reach effect (a big hit) is notified. After that, as shown in FIG. 51(G), the effect design whose big hit display result was displayed in the small symbol format is returned to the original size and original position as shown in FIG. 52(A) and is displayed. A stop symbol effect is performed in which a message image 74 in which the character "big hit" is displayed is displayed below the effect symbol.

On the other hand, in the battle reach production, when the variable display result becomes the disparity display result, the defeat production described above is executed, and the disparity display result is derived and displayed in the representation symbol displayed in the small symbol format, and the demonstration symbol is It will be displayed in its original size and position.

Next, the story reach effect shown in FIG. 52 will be described. After the variation display of the effect symbols is started all at once, as shown in FIG. 52(A), after the effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right" are stopped to reach the reach state, the reach effect is reached. When the story reach effect is executed as, first, as shown in FIG. 52B, the effect symbols in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are reduced. A small symbol display format is displayed and moved to the upper right corner of the screen, and a message image 54A in which the characters "story first half" are displayed is displayed in the center of the screen. This notifies that the story reach effect will be executed.

The story reach effect is an effect in which a moving image (story moving image) having a story like a specific story is displayed. In this example, the story reach production is composed of two parts, the first half and the second half. In the story reach production, there are cases where the production is finished in the middle without completing the story and the display result is derived and displayed, and when the story continues to the end and production is completed and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed. There is.

When the variable display result is a disappointing display result, an effect that the story reach effect ends in the first half is executed, and when the variable display result is a big hit display result, the story reach effect continues from the first half to the second half. You may make it perform the production which continues to.

In addition, in the story reach effect, the effect may be set so that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the effect is performed to the end than when the effect is finished in the first half. .. In addition, the story reach effect may be a one-part structure that is not divided into the first half and the second half.

After the message image 54A is displayed, a moving image developed according to the story corresponding to the "first half of the story" is displayed. When the "first half of the story" ends and the "second half of the story" continues to be executed, a message image 54B with the characters "second half of the story" is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. It As a result, the fact that the story reach effect is continuously executed is notified. Note that in the story reach effect, an image such as the message images 54A and 54B indicating the story reach effect may not be displayed.

After the message image 54B is displayed, a moving image developed according to the story corresponding to the "second half of the story" is displayed. In the story reach effect, when the variable display result becomes the big hit display result, the flame effect image 73 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 72 as shown in FIG. 52D as an image display that can specify that the story is completed. 52E, the movable member 321 moves to the standing position, and the story completion effect that appears in front of the display area of the effect display device 5 is executed.

On the other hand, in the story reach effect, when the variable display result is a distorted display result, a story unfinished effect that can specify that the story is not completed is performed, and a black image 72 as shown in FIGS. The effect using the flame effect image 73 and the movable member 321 is not executed.

Specifically, in the story completion effect, as shown in FIG. 52D, the entire display area of the effect display device 5 is changed to a black black image 72, and in the area at the lower center of the screen of the effect display device 5, The effect of displaying the flame effect image 73 as the effect effect display and superimposing it on the black image 72 is provided. In the story completion effect, as shown in FIG. 52(E), the movable member motion effect that appears in the central area in the display area of the effect display device 5 by moving the movable member 321 to the standing position. Will be done. Then, the appeared movable member 321 is caused to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 52(E), when the movable member 321 appears and moves to the standing position due to the movable body motion effect, the flame of the flame effect image 73 to be superimposed and displayed becomes large around the movable member 321. A moving image showing a display mode in which the display range of the effect image 73 is enlarged is displayed. The moving image is an effect executed by using the flame effect image 73 in order to enhance the effect effect based on the operation of the movable member 321, and is called an operation effect effect as in the case of FIG. 51. With such an operation effect effect, an effect in which the operation mode of the movable member 321 and the display mode of the flame effect image 73 are related is executed. By performing such an effect, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display unit are linked.

Then, as shown in FIG. 52(F), the big hit display result (same symbol stop) is derived and displayed in the effect design that was displayed in the small symbol format, and the message image 55 showing the character "Congratulations" is displayed. , Is displayed in the center of the screen as a reach result effect that is an effect indicating the result of the reach state. This notifies that the story reach effect has been completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 52(G), the effect design whose big hit display result was displayed in the small symbol format is returned to the original size and original position as shown in FIG. 52(A) and is displayed. A stop symbol effect is performed in which a message image 74 in which the character "big hit" is displayed is displayed below the effect symbol.

In the story reach effect, the effect image is displayed similarly to the battle reach effect, but unlike the battle reach effect, the entire display area of the effect display device 5 is a black image, and the effect image is superimposed and displayed on the black image. As a result, the effect image can be further emphasized and displayed, and image display having a higher effect effect than the battle reach effect can be executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the valuable feeling (premier feeling) of the story reach effect, which has a higher expectation for a big hit than the battle reach effect.

On the other hand, in the story reach production, when the variable display result becomes a display error result, the above-mentioned story unfinished production is executed, and the display display result is derived and displayed in the production design displayed in the small symbol format, and the production design thereof. However, the original size and the original position are restored and displayed.

The movable member 321 may be configured such that the disk-shaped portion can be rotated by a driving unit such as a motor that is drive-controlled by the effect control CPU 120. When the disk-shaped portion of the movable member 321 can be rotationally controlled as described above, the movable member 321 is moved to the standing position and displayed as shown in FIG. 51(E) or FIG. 52(E). You may perform the control which rotates a disk-shaped part, when it appears in front of the display area of the apparatus 5, or when it appears. In that case, in accordance with the rotation operation of the movable member 321, an image for operating an effect image such as the particle effect image 71 of FIG. 51E and the flame effect image 73 of FIG. You may perform the effect control displayed in. By doing so, the effect produced by using the movable member 321 and the effect image can be further enhanced.

Further, the movable member 321 is not limited to a rotating operation, but a part or all of its constituent members perform a deforming operation such as opening and closing or contracting by a driving unit such as a solenoid driven and controlled by the production control CPU 120. The movable member may be displayed on the effect display device 5 in accordance with the deformation operation of the movable member located in front of the display area of the effect display device 5 in a specific effect scene. You may perform effect control which displays the image which operates the effect image.

Next, a control example of an effect effect and a movable object effect in a specific super reach effect such as a battle reach effect and a story reach effect will be described using a timing chart.

FIG. 53 is a timing chart showing a control example of the effect effect and the movable object effect in the specific super reach effect. FIG. 53(A) shows a control example of the effect effect and the movable object effect in the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. FIG. 53B shows a control example of the effect effect and the movable body effect in the story reach effect as shown in FIG. 52.

First, with reference to FIG. 53(A), a control example of the effect effect and the movable body effect in the battle reach effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described. When the battle reach effect is executed, from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) to the time of occurrence of the reach state, the effect symbol is in the effect mode of the normal variable display as shown in FIG. 51(A). Is displayed on the effect display device 5.

In the effect display device 5, when the reach state occurs, as shown in FIGS. 51B and 51C, the message image 53 is displayed and the moving image such as the battle effect corresponding to the battle reach effect is displayed. To be done. As shown in FIGS. 51(D) and (E) on the effect display device 5, the timing at which the image display of the battle effect is changed to the image display of the victory effect is a turning point of the first change of the image regarding the battle reach effect ( It is the time when it becomes the break of the video cut). At such a timing (first video change node) as a turning point of the first video change related to the battle reach effect, the particle effect image is displayed on the battle effect image as shown in FIGS. 51(D) and (E). The particle effect effect of displaying the image on which 71 is superimposed and displayed on the effect display device 5 and the movable body operation effect of operating the movable member 321 are executed in a linked manner.

In the effect display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 51E and 51F, the movable member 321 moves to the standing position and the timing at which the image display of the victory effect is changed to the image display of the reach result effect is the battle reach. It is a time when it becomes a turning point (break of the video cut) of the second change of the video related to the production. At the timing (second image change node) of the second video change related to such battle reach effect, the particle effect image 71 is superimposed on the victory effect image as shown in FIG. 51(E). A motion effect effect such as an image to be displayed is executed on the effect display device 5.

Then, when the action effect effect and the movable body action effect are finished, the reach display is informed by the image display of the reach result effect as shown in FIG. Then, when the reach result effect is finished, the effect display device 5 executes a stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 51(G), so that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is confirmed and the variable display is performed. finish.

As described above, in the battle reach effect, effect effect display in which the particle effect image 71 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 72 is executed at the timing of the turning point of the change in the image related to the reach effect. Further, in the battle reach effect, an effect in which a movable body effect such as the movable member 321 and an effect effect display are linked with each other is executed at the timing of a turning point of the image relating to the reach effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53B, a control example of the effect effect and the movable body effect in the story reach effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described. When the story reach effect is executed, from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) to the time when the reach state occurs, the effect symbol in the effect mode of the normal variable display as shown in FIG. 52(A). Is displayed on the effect display device 5.

When the reach state occurs in the effect display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 52B and 52C, message images 54A and 54B are displayed and a moving image such as a story moving image corresponding to the story reach effect is displayed. The image is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 52D and 52E on the effect display device 5, the timing at which the image display of the story effect is changed to the image display of the story completion effect is a turning point of the first change of the image regarding the story reach effect. It is the time when it becomes the break of the video cut. At the timing (first video change node) that is the turning point of the first video change related to such story reach effect, the flame effect image is displayed on the black image 72 as shown in FIGS. 52D and 52E. The flame effect effect of displaying the image on which 73 is superimposed and displayed on the effect display device 5 and the movable body operation effect of operating the movable member 321 are executed in a linked manner.

In the effect display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 52(E) and (F), the movable member 321 moves to the standing position, and the timing at which the image display of the story completion effect is changed to the image display of the reach result effect is the story. It is a time when it becomes a turning point (break of the image cut) of the second change in the image related to reach production. At the timing (second image change node) of the second video change related to such story reach effect, the flame effect image 73 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 72 as shown in FIG. 52(E). A motion effect effect such as an image to be executed is executed on the effect display device 5.

Then, when the action effect effect and the movable body action effect are finished, the reach display is informed by the image display of the reach result effect as shown in FIG. After that, when the reach result effect is finished, the effect display device 5 executes the stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 52(G), thereby performing the display for confirming the stop symbol of the effect symbol and the variable display. finish.

As described above, in the story reach effect, effect effect display in which the flame effect image 73 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 72 is executed at the timing of a turning point of the change in the image related to the reach effect. Furthermore, in the story reach production, the production in which the movable body production such as the movable member 321 and the production effect display are linked is executed at the timing of the turning point of the image relating to the reach production.

In the battle reach effect shown in FIGS. 51 and 53A and the story reach effect shown in FIGS. 52 and 53B, specifically, the following processing is executed in the effect control CPU 120. It is realized by

As the fluctuation pattern command (fluctuation pattern designation command), when the fluctuation pattern command in which the fluctuation pattern of the super-reach of the type that executes the battle reach effect is specified among the fluctuation pattern commands of the super-reach is received by the effect control board 12. In the effect symbol variation start process (S74), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display of the effect display device 5 and the operation control of the movable member 321 for the battle reach effect as shown in FIGS. 51 and 53A. The effect control data (process data or the like) for performing is selected from a plurality of types of effect control data stored in advance and set (stored) in the RAM 122. The battle reach effect is partly different when the variable display result is the big hit display result and when it is the off display result, so when the variable pattern command or the display result designation command that can specify the variable display result is received. First, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received command content to recognize the variable display result, and selects effect control data according to the variable display result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of effect symbols, and in the effect symbol changing process (S75), using the effect control data set to execute the battle reach effect, the movable object effect process and effect. By executing the effect display process and the like, the image display control of the effect display device 5 and the operation control of the movable member 321 are performed, and the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 53(A) is executed.

As the variation pattern command (variation pattern designation command), when the variation pattern command in which the variation pattern of the type of super-reach that executes the story reach production is designated is received in the production control board 12 among the variation pattern commands of the super reach. In the effect symbol variation start processing (S74), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display of the effect display device 5 and the operation control of the movable member 321 for the story reach effect as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53B. The effect control data (process data or the like) for performing is selected from a plurality of types of effect control data stored in advance and set (stored) in the RAM 122. The story reach effect is partly different when the variable display result is a big hit display result and when it is an outlier display result, so when a variable pattern command or display result specification command that can specify the variable display result is received First, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received command content to recognize the variable display result, and selects effect control data according to the variable display result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the effect symbol, and uses the effect control data set to execute the story reach effect in the effect symbol changing process (S75), using the movable object effect process and effect. By executing the effect display process and the like, the image display control of the effect display device 5 and the operation control of the movable member 321 are performed, and the story reach effect as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53B is executed.

When the movable body effect is executable in a plurality of types of effect display such as the battle reach effect shown in FIGS. 51 and 53(A) and the story reach effect shown in FIGS. 52 and 53(B). Depending on which kind of effect display is performed, effect effect display in which effect images are superimposed and displayed on a black image, and effect effect display in which effect images are superimposed and displayed on effect images. Since different effect effect displays can be displayed, it is possible to enhance the effect effect in which the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display unit are linked.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51(E) and FIG. 53(A), a specific type of effect display such as a battle reach effect in which a movable object effect for operating a movable object such as the movable member 321 is executed is executed. 51D, the effect display of a specific aspect such as the particle effect image 71 of FIG. 51E is superimposed on the specific type of effect display such as the display of the victory effect image, which can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to link the specific type of effect display in which the movable body effect is executed and the effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 5, and the operation of the movable object by the specific type of effect display. It is possible to further enhance the effect effect in which the effect effect display of the display means is linked.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 52(E) and 53(B), a specific type of effect display such as story reach effect in which a movable body effect for operating a movable body such as the movable member 321 is executed is executed. 52D and (E), the effect display of a specific aspect such as the flame effect image 73 is changed to a predetermined image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 5 such as the black image 72. Since the effect to be displayed in a superimposed manner can be executed, in addition to the fact that the predetermined effect of the predetermined type in which the movable object effect is executed and the effect effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 5 can be linked. Thus, the enjoyment of the game can be improved by emphasizing the movable body effect.

In addition, the production of linking (coordinating) the movable body and the production effect display such as the battle reach production and the story reach production described above may be executed in a reach production other than the super reach, and may be executed in a production other than the reach production. You may.

In addition, an example in which the production of linking (coordinating) the movable body and the production effect display, such as the battle reach production and the story reach production described above, is executed at the timing of a turning point of the image related to the production is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed at a timing other than the timing at which a change in the image relating to the effect occurs, such as the timing after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the effect execution.

Further, the particle effect image and the flame effect image have been described as an example as the effect effect display in the effect in which the movable body and the effect effect display are linked (coordinated) like the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above. The effect display is not limited to this, and other types of effect display such as an effect image in which light is emitted may be used.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, it is possible to display a different effect effect display depending on which of the two effect displays, the battle reach effect and the story reach effect, is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to display different effect display effects depending on which of the three or more types of effect display is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, among the plurality of effect displays such as the battle reach effect and the story reach effect, different effect effect displays are displayed depending on which effect display is performed. An example has been shown in which the effect effect display mode is changed depending on whether or not the black image 72 is displayed when possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example in which the form of the effect effect display is different, a black image is displayed in any kind of effect display, but the type of effect effect display such as an effect image may be different. The different types of effect effect display in that case may be that any one of the components of the effect effect display such as the shape, color, display range, and brightness of the effect effect display image is different.

Further, as an effect for linking (coordinating) the movable body and the effect effect display like the above-mentioned battle reach effect and story reach effect, images of effect effect display as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52 are displayed first. Not limited to the effect of moving the movable body later, an effect of displaying the effect effect image and the operation of the movable body at the same timing may be used, and an image of the effect effect display after the movable body is first operated. You may use the production which displays.

Further, as an effect using the black image 72 as in the story reach effect described above, an example is shown in which the black image 72 is displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, control may be performed to display the black image 72 in a partial display area of the effect display device 5 such as an area for displaying an effect image.

In addition, as a production for linking a movable body such as the movable member described above and a production effect display such as an effect image, the movable body is operated at each time when a plurality of types of production displays with different production display situations are displayed. When performing the effect, depending on the situation of the effect display for moving the movable body, an effect image display as a different kind of effect effect display may be executed in association with the operation of the movable body. Good. For example, different types of effect image display may be executed in the following effect display situations. (A) When displaying the effect image display corresponding to operating the movable body before reaching the reach state during the variable display of the effect symbol. (B) When displaying the effect image display corresponding to the operation of the movable body at the time of temporary stop in the pseudo series. (C) When displaying an effect image display corresponding to operating a movable body during execution of normal reach. (D) When displaying an effect image display corresponding to moving a movable body during execution of super reach effect. (E) When an effect image display is displayed corresponding to operating a movable body during the development of a production during execution of a super-reach of the development production format in which the production content develops. (F) It is possible to operate the movable body when the lottery effect (for example, an effect of lottery to determine whether it is a probability variation big hit or a non-probability variation jackpot) is given again after notifying that the jackpot display result has been obtained. To display the effect image display. (G) When displaying an effect image display corresponding to operating the movable body during the big hit game state production. (H) When displaying an effect image display corresponding to operating a movable body during a customer waiting demonstration display that is executed when a game is not being played. It should be noted that at least two of the effect image displays executed in the plurality of types of effect display situations as described above may be different.

[Other examples of production using movable members]
Next, another example of effect using a movable body such as the movable member 321 will be described. The effect described below is executed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing a control example of the effect effect and the movable body combining operation effect in the specific super reach effect.

As the movable body such as the movable member 321 described above, a movable body is used which includes a plurality of movable bodies, is in a separated state in a normal state, and can be controlled to operate in a united state in a specific state. Good. The mergeable movable member may be one in which a plurality of movable members are interlocked by drive means (motor, solenoid, etc.) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of movable members. It may be driven by a driving means (motor, solenoid, etc.).

In the control example of FIG. 54, description that is the same as that of the control example of FIG. 53 will be omitted, and parts different from the control example of FIG. 53 will be mainly described. FIG. 54(A) shows a control example of the effect effect and the movable body union effect in the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. FIG. 53(B) shows a control example of the effect effect and the movable body union effect in the story reach effect as shown in FIG. 52.

The control example of FIG. 54 differs from the control example of FIG. 53 in that instead of the movable body motion effect of FIG. 53, a movable body combination motion effect is executed.

In the battle reach effect shown in FIG. 54(A), instead of the movable body operation effect by the movable member 321 shown in FIG. 51(E) in the battle effect as shown in FIG. 51, the movable movable member is changed from the separated state to the combined state. A movable body uniting effect that operates in the above manner is executed.

In the story reach effect shown in FIG. 54(B), instead of the movable body motion effect by the movable member 321 shown in FIG. 52(E) in the story reach effect as shown in FIG. The movable body uniting effect that operates in the state is executed.

In the story reach effect shown in FIG. 54(B), for example, just before the end of the second half of the story reach effect executed after the message image 54B of the “second half of the story” in FIG. 52(C) is displayed, for example, the effect. In a specific display area of the display device 9, an operation promotion effect of performing an operation promotion display for promoting the operation of the push button 31B such as “press the button” is executed. Then, when the player operates the push button 31B within a predetermined period from the start of the operation promotion effect, or when the predetermined period elapses without performing the operation within the predetermined period, the above-described movable body combination is performed. The performance is executed.

The control for executing the movable body union effect in accordance with such an operation promotion effect may be executed immediately before the end of the battle reach image display in the battle reach effect of FIG. 54(A). In this way, the control for executing the movable body combination effect in accordance with the operation promotion effect may be executed at the first video change node in the specific super reach effect. Further, the control for executing the movable body combination effect in accordance with the operation promotion effect may be executed at another image change node such as the second image change node in the specific super reach effect. In addition to the push button 31B, other operation means such as the stick controller 31A may be used as the operation means when the movable body union effect is executed according to the operation of the operation means. In addition to the operation means, the movable body combination effect may be executed in response to the detection of a specific motion of the player by a detection device such as a motion sensor that detects the motion of the player. That is, any effect control may be executed as long as it is effect control for executing the movable body union effect in accordance with the player's operation.

Further, the control for executing the movable body union effect in accordance with such an operation promotion effect may not be executed. The control for executing the movable body union effect in accordance with such an operation promotion effect is selected by the predetermined lottery process executed by the effect control CPU 120 at a predetermined rate, and is selected to be executed. It may be executed from time to time.

In the case of executing the movable body combination effect using the movable body movable member as described above, the same effect as in the case of executing the movable body combination effect using the movable member 321 described above can be obtained. Furthermore, the fun of the presentation can be improved by the uniting operation.

[Moveable body motion during round]
As described above, when the definite variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the definite special symbol in the special drawing game, as a result of the variation display of the production symbol, the definite production symbol which is usually the big jackpot combination (non-certain variation jackpot combination) is stopped and displayed. There may be things to do. Specifically, when the normal big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game, the fixed big symbol combination which is the normal big hit combination is stopped and displayed at a rate of 100% as the variable display result of the effect symbol. , When the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game, the fixed production jackpot combination which is the probability variation jackpot combination is stopped and displayed at the first ratio (for example, 60%) as the variation display result of the effect symbol. Then, it is configured such that the fixed effect symbols that are usually the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed at the second rate (for example, 40%).

In such a configuration, the effect control CPU 120, as the variable display result of the effect symbol, when the fixed effect symbol that is usually the big hit combination (non-probability variation big hit combination) is stopped and displayed, the probability variation control after the big hit game state ends. The effect suggesting whether or not to be performed is executed in the big hit display process (S77), the big hit game process (S78), the big hit end effect process (S79), or the like. In the present embodiment, in the big hit game process (S78), when a predetermined round (for example, the fifth round) is being executed, a round indicating whether or not the probability variation control is performed after the end of the big hit game state. Medium suggestion production shall be executed. Among the rounds in the big hit game state, this predetermined round is a normally open round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is relatively long. ..

In this round suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 56B and 56D, the effect effect of superimposing the flame effect image 1010 or the lightning effect image 1020 on the black image 1001 and the movable member 321 are operated. The movable body motion effect is executed in a linked manner, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 56(f) to (h), the character 1060 performs an action of breaking the rock 1062 with the hammer 1061, and as a result, the rock 1062 cracks. Depending on whether or not the big hit game state is over, a challenge effect for informing whether or not the probability variation control is performed is executed.

In the in-round suggestive effect, as shown in FIG. 55, the effect effect and the movable body motion effect are executed in a manner that cooperates with one of the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2. As the effect presentation, what superimposes and displays the flame effect image 1010 on the black image 1001 as shown in FIG. 56(b) is called a flame effect presentation. As shown in FIG. 56(d), the black image 1001 is displayed on the black image 1001. What superimposes and displays the lightning effect image 1020 is called a lightning effect effect.

When the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, that is, when the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special drawing game, it is a success mode of notifying the probability variation control in the challenge effect (FIG. 56(g)). , It is informed that the probability change control will be performed after the jackpot gaming state ends. When the jackpot type is a non-probable variation jackpot, that is, when the normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special drawing game, it is a failure mode in which the probability variation control is not notified in the challenge effect (FIG. 56(h)). ), it is notified that the probability variation control is not performed (becomes a low probability state) after the jackpot gaming state ends.

The production pattern A1 executes the first movable body motion production, executes the flame effect production as the first effect production, and does not execute the second movable body production production and the second effect production, but the challenge production. It is a production pattern that shifts to. The effect control CPU 120 selects the effect pattern A1 at a rate of 2% when the big hit type is the probability variation big hit, and selects the effect pattern A1 at a rate of 50% when the big hit type is the non-probability variation big hit. ..

In the effect pattern A2, the first moving object motion effect is executed, the flame effect effect is executed as the first effect effect, the second movable object operation effect is executed, and the second flame effect effect is applied. It is a production pattern that shifts to challenge production after execution. The effect control CPU 120 selects the effect pattern A2 at a rate of 8% when the big hit type is the probability variation big hit, and selects the effect pattern A2 at a rate of 25% when the big hit type is the uncertain variation big hit. ..

In the effect pattern A3, the first movable object motion effect is executed, the flame effect effect is executed as the first effect effect, the second movable object operation effect is executed, and the lightning effect effect is executed as the second effect effect. It is a production pattern that shifts to challenge production after execution. The effect control CPU 120 selects the effect pattern A3 at a rate of 25% when the big hit type is the probability variation big hit, and selects the effect pattern A3 at a rate of 1% when the big hit type is the uncertain variation big hit. ..

In the effect pattern B1, the first moving effect operation effect is executed, the lightning effect effect is executed as the first effect effect, and the second moving effect operation effect and the second effect effect are not executed, and the challenge effect is effected. It is a production pattern that shifts to. The effect control CPU 120 selects the effect pattern B1 at a rate of 25% when the type of big hit is the probability varying big hit, and selects the effect pattern B1 at a rate of 16% when the type of big hit is the uncertain variation big hit. ..

In the effect pattern B2, the lightning effect effect is executed as the first effect effect, the lightning effect effect is executed as the first effect effect, and the lightning effect effect is executed as the second effect effect while the movable object operation effect is executed for the second time. It is a production pattern that shifts to challenge production after execution. The effect control CPU 120 selects the effect pattern B2 at a rate of 40% when the type of big hit is the probability varying big hit, and selects the effect pattern B2 at a rate of 8% when the type of big hit is the undetermined varying big hit. ..

When the movable body motion effect and the effect effect are executed in each of the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, A3, B2, B1, It becomes A2 and A1. The degree of expectation here is calculated, for example, by [probability of probability variation big hit/(probability of probability variation big hit + proportion of non-probability variation big hit)] when the effect is executed in the effect pattern. The effect pattern (A2, A3, B2) in which the movable body motion effect and the effect effect are executed twice is expected more than the effect pattern (A1, B1) in which the movable object motion effect and the effect effect are executed only once. The degree is high.

When the effect is executed by the effect pattern (A3, B1, or B2) including the lightning effect effect, the effect is expected more than when the effect is executed by the effect pattern (A1 or A2) that does not include the lightning effect effect. The degree is high. Further, when the first effect effect is the lightning effect effect (B1 or B2), the expectation is higher than when the first effect effect is the flame effect effect (A1, A2, or A3). However, when the first effect effect is the flame effect effect and the second effect effect is the lightning effect effect, that is, when the effect effect is a rising effect, both the first effect effect and the second effect effect are the lightning effect effects. Expectations are higher than in the case of production.

It should be noted that there is no so-called down effect pattern in which the first effect effect is the lightning effect effect and the second effect effect is the flame effect effect. By limiting the effects of such a fall (prohibiting such effects or making their execution ratio lower than A3), the interest of the effect effects is not reduced.

Next, an example in which the movable body motion effect and the effect effect are executed in the effect pattern of A1 or A3 will be described with reference to FIG. When the reach result effect described above is completed, the effect display device 5 executes a stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 56(a), so that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is confirmed and the variable display is performed. finish. In this example, when the normal big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the fixed effect symbol which is the normal big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the variation display result of the effect symbol, or in the special figure game. When the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it is assumed that the fixed effect symbol which is the normal big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the variation display result of the effect symbol.

In the example of FIG. 56(a), the effect symbol whose symbol number which is not the probability variation symbol is "4" is predetermined in each effect symbol display area 5L, 5R, 5C of "left", "middle", and "right". Are stopped and displayed on the effective line of. In addition, a stop symbol effect is performed in which a message image 74 in which the character "big hit" is displayed is displayed below the effect symbol. The effect control CPU 120 executes an effect according to the execution of each round in accordance with the control to the jackpot gaming state. For example, the display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed, and the image 1000 in which the characters "RoundXX" (XX indicates the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen. To do. Then, the in-round suggestion effect is executed as an effect corresponding to the execution of the fifth round.

In the first movable body motion effect shown in FIG. 56B, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable member 321 from the tilted position to the upright position (first upright time). Then, at the timing when the movable member 321 reaches the standing position (the timing when the standing state is reached), the background image of the image 1000 is changed from the normal background image to the black image 1001, and at the same time, the flame effect image is displayed on the black image 1001. A flame effect effect of superimposing and displaying 1010 is executed.

When the flame effect effect is continued for a predetermined period while the movable member 321 is in the upright position, the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image of the image 1000 from the black image 1001 to the normal background image as shown in FIG. 56(c). At the same time, the flame effect image 1010 is deleted and the flame effect effect is terminated. Then, when the flame effect effect is finished, the movable member 321 is moved from the standing position to the tilted position (first tilting).

When A1 is selected as the effect pattern, after the movable member 321 moves to the tilt position (after the first tilt), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the challenge effect. On the other hand, when A3 is selected as the effect pattern, after the movable member 321 is moved to the tilted position (after the first tilting), the effect is the second movable body motion effect shown in FIG. 56(d). The control CPU 120 moves the movable member 321 from the tilted position to the standing position again (second standing position). Then, at the timing when the movable member 321 reaches the standing position (the timing when the standing state is reached), the background image of the image 1000 is changed from the normal background image to the black image 1001, and at the same time, the lightning effect image is displayed on the black image 1001. A lightning effect effect of displaying 1020 in a superimposed manner is executed.

When the lightning effect production is continued for a predetermined period while the movable member 321 is in the upright position, the production control CPU 120 changes the background image of the image 1000 from the black image 1001 to the normal background image as shown in FIG. 56(e). At the same time, the lightning effect image 1020 is deleted and the lightning effect effect is terminated. Then, at the timing when the lightning effect effect is finished, the movable member 321 is moved again from the standing position to the tilted position (second tilting). Then, after the movable member 321 moves to the tilted position, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the challenge effect.

When A2 is selected as the effect pattern, the effect control CPU 120 superimposes and displays the flame effect image 1010 on the black image 1001 in the second movable body motion effect shown in FIG. 56(d). The flame effect effect is executed again, the second flame effect effect is ended in FIG. 56(e), and the process moves to the challenge effect.

As shown in FIG. 56(f), in the challenge effect, first, in the challenge effect, the common effect image is displayed regardless of whether the jackpot type is the probability varying jackpot or the non-determining variation jackpot.

This effect image includes an image 1050 in which the characters "Challenge Time" are displayed, a message image 1051 in which the characters "Probably change if rock breaks!" and a character 1060 are displayed. , Hammer 1061 and rock 1062. This reminds the player that "the character 1060 is an effect of trying to crack the rock 1062 with the hammer 1061", and further, "when the rock is cracked, the jackpot type is a definite change jackpot regardless of the stop symbol effect. It is made to recognize to the player.

When the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image of a successful aspect in which the character 1060 succeeds in breaking the rock 1062 with the hammer 1061, as shown in FIG. , A message image 1070 in which the characters “probable change promotion!!” are displayed. As a result, the player grasps that, although the fixed effect symbol that is usually the combination of big hits is stopped and displayed in the stop symbol effect, the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the decided special symbol in the special figure game. ..

When the jackpot type is uncertain variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 fails to break the rock 1062 by the character 1060 by the hammer 1061 and the hammer 1061 is broken, as shown in FIG. 56(h). While displaying the image of the aspect, the message image 1080 in which the character "Fail!" is displayed is displayed. As a result, the player grasps that the normal big hit symbol is also stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, as the fixed effect symbol which is the normal big hit combination is stopped and displayed in the stop symbol effect.

57A to 57C are timing charts showing execution timings and execution periods of the movable body motion effect, the effect effect, and the challenge effect when each of the effect patterns A1 to A3 is selected.

In any of the effect patterns A1 to A3, when the stop symbol effect in which the effect symbols with the symbol numbers that are not the probability variation symbols are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line at the timing (1), the stop symbol effect is executed. After the big hit display processing (S77) is executed at the timing (2), the big game playing processing (S78) is executed. Further, in the big hit game processing (S78), the effect corresponding to each round is executed, and the above-described suggestion during round is executed as the effect corresponding to the fifth round. When the fifth round is started, the flame effect effect is executed when the first standing motion of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (3), and the first tilting motion of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (4). The flame effect production ends when is performed.

As described above, in the first execution period of the movable body motion effect, the common effect effect is executed in any of the effect patterns A1 to A3. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp which effect pattern the effect pattern is during the execution period of the first movable body motion effect.

In the case of the effect pattern A1, the second move object motion effect is not performed thereafter, and the challenge effect is performed at the timing (7). In the case of the effect pattern A2, the second flame effect effect is executed when the second standing operation of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (5), and the second tilting of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (6). The second flame effect effect ends when the action is performed. Then, at the timing (7), the challenge production is started. In the case of the effect pattern A3, the lightning effect effect is executed when the second standing motion of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (5), and the second tilting motion of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (6). When it is called, the lightning effect production ends. Then, at the timing (7), the challenge production is started.

In any of the effect patterns A1 to A3, in the challenge effect, the result notification is performed at the timing of (8), and it is informed that it becomes a success mode and becomes a high-precision state after the jackpot gaming state ends, Alternatively, it is informed that it becomes a failure mode and becomes a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state is finished.

In this way, when the effect pattern A3 is selected, different effect effects are produced depending on whether the first movable object motion effect is executed or the second movable object operation effect is executed. Since it is executed, it is possible to diversify the form of the effect in which the movable body action effect and the effect effect cooperate, and to improve the interest.

Further, when the effect pattern A3 is selected, the expected degree, that is, later, as compared with the case where the effect patterns A1 and A2 in which the flame effect effect is executed in the first movable body operation effect are selected, as in the case of A3. There is a high percentage of successful aspects in the challenge performance that is executed. Therefore, the player determines whether or not the second movable body motion effect is to be executed, and when the second movable body motion effect is to be executed, the player can perform the flame effect effect and the lightning effect effect accordingly. By paying attention to which one is executed, it is possible to further improve the interest of the effect in which the movable body motion effect and the effect effect are linked.

Further, the effect pattern in which the lightning effect effect is executed has a higher expectation than the effect pattern in which only the flame effect effect is executed, but like the effect pattern A3, the flame effect is generated in the first movable body operation effect. Even if the effect is executed, a flame effect effect is executed in the first movable object operation effect by providing an effect pattern in which the lightning effect effect is executed in the second movable object operation effect. Even so, it is possible to expect that the lightning effect effect will be executed in the second movable body operation effect without discouraging the player. Further, even when compared with the effect pattern in which the lightning effect effect is executed in the first movable object operation effect, the effect pattern A3 has a higher degree of expectation, so that the flame effect effect is generated in the first movable object operation effect. When executed, the player's interest can be maintained.

(Modification 1)
During execution of the effect effect, the operation promotion effect may be executed in which the operation promotion display for promoting the operation of the push button 31B is performed in the specific display area of the effect display device 9. Then, when the player operates the push button 31B within a predetermined period from the start of the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 may change the effect effect mode.

FIG. 58 shows a specific example. Descriptions regarding FIGS. 58A to 58C are the same as those in FIGS. 56A to 56C, and a description thereof will be omitted. After the movable member 321 is moved to the tilted position (after the first tilting), in the second movable body motion effect shown in FIG. 56(i), the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable member 321 from the tilted position to the standing position. Move it again (the second standing). Then, at the timing when the movable member 321 reaches the standing position (the timing when the standing position is reached), the background image of the image 1000 is changed to the black image 1001 and, at the same time, the flame effect image 1020 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001. Perform the flame effect production again.

When the flame effect effect is continued for a predetermined period while the movable member 321 is in the upright position, the effect control CPU 120 pushes the push button 31B on the black image 1001 and the flame effect image 1010, as shown in FIG. 56(j). The operation promotion effect in which the operation promotion image including the image 1090 imitating the above and the message image 1091 in which the characters “press!” are displayed is displayed in a superimposed manner.

The operation promotion image is erased (the operation promotion effect ends) when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) that has been set in advance without the push button 31B being operated has elapsed from the start of display. When the bush button 31B is operated within the period in which the operation promotion image is displayed, the operation promotion image is erased (the operation promotion effect ends). Then, when the bush button 31B is operated, the effect control CPU 120 selects, as an effect pattern, an effect pattern capable of changing the mode of the effect effect in accordance with the operation of the player. ), the effect image superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001 is changed from the flame effect image 1010 to the lightning effect image 1020. On the other hand, when the effect pattern that does not change the mode of the effect effect according to the operation of the player is selected as the effect pattern, the effect image superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001 is displayed as shown in FIG. 56(l). The flame effect image 1010 remains unchanged.

FIG. 59(A) shows the execution timing and the execution period of the movable body action effect, the effect effect, and the challenge effect when the effect pattern capable of changing the aspect of the effect effect according to the operation of the player is selected. It is a timing chart.

The description regarding the timings (1) to (4) is the same as that in FIG. 57, and thus the description is omitted. At the timing (5), the second flame effect effect is executed when the second standing operation of the movable member 321 is performed. Then, the operation promotion image is displayed at the timing (X) within the second flame effect production period. When the operation promotion image is displayed, the effect image displayed on the black image 1001 is changed from the flame effect image 1010 to the lightning effect image 1020 in response to the push button 32B being operated at the timing (Y). Let When the second tilting operation of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (6), the lightning effect effect ends. Then, at the timing (7), the challenge production is started.

As described above, since it is possible to change the mode of the effect effect according to the operation of the player, the interest of the effect effect can be further improved. Further, by changing the flame effect image 1010 having a low expectation to the lightning effect image 1020 having a high expectation in accordance with the operation of the player, it is possible to give an unexpected effect to the effect.

For example, in the effect pattern A2 described above, the operation promotion image is displayed in a superimposed manner on the black image 1001 and the flame effect image 1010 within the period in which the second flame effect effect is being executed. Then, when the push button 31B is operated, the operation promotion image is erased (the operation promotion effect ends), but the effect image superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001 remains unchanged as the flame effect image 1010. Performance control shall be performed. Thereby, "a production pattern in which the aspect of the effect production is not changed according to the operation of the player" may be configured.

Further, in the above-described effect pattern A3, when the second movable body operation effect is executed, initially, as the effect effect, the flame effect image 1010 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001 instead of the lightning effect image 1020. Every other time, the operation promotion image is superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001 and the flame effect image 1010 within the period in which the flame effect image 1010 is displayed. Then, when the push button 31B is operated, the operation promotion image is erased (the operation promotion effect ends), and the effect image superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001 changes from the flame effect image 1010 to the lightning effect image 1020. The production control is performed so as to Thereby, a "production pattern for changing the mode of effect production according to the operation of the player" may be configured.

In the example shown in FIG. 59(A), when the flame effect effect is changed to the lightning effect effect in response to the operation of the push button 31B, the already started display of the black image 1001 is continued without being terminated. Then, only the effect image to be superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001 is changed from the flame effect image 1010 to the lightning effect image 1020. That is, if the effect effect is composed of the black image 1001 that is the first effect and the effect image that is the second effect, only the aspect of the second effect is changed without changing the aspect of the first effect. As a result, it is possible to give the impression that the mode has changed according to the operation of the player during the execution of a series of effects.

(Modification 2)
In the example described above, the movable body motion effect, the effect effect, and the challenge effect are effects that are executed during the execution of the round, and suggest whether or not the probability variation control is performed after the jackpot gaming state ends. Not limited to such a form, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, respectively. , As a reach effect executed when the effect symbol is variably displayed, a movable body motion effect, an effect effect, and a challenge effect are executed, and whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled by these effect patterns and effect modes. You may try to suggest that.

The effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2 described above are applied as effect patterns of the movable body motion effect and the effect effect executed in the reach state. That is, when the movable body motion effect and the effect effect are executed as the reach effect in each effect pattern of the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, A3, in the order in which the jackpot gaming state is controlled at a high rate. B2, B1, A2, A1.

FIG. 59(B) shows a control example of the effect effect, the movable object effect, and the challenge effect as the reach effect. Between the start (11) of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) and the time (12) when the reach state occurs, the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect mode of the normal variable display as shown in FIG. 51(A). Is performed on the effect display device 5.

When the reach state occurs at the timing (12) on the effect display device 5, the reach effect is entered. In the reach effect, the flame effect effect is executed when the first standing operation of the movable member 321 is performed at timing (13), and the flame effect is performed when the first tilting operation of the movable member 321 is performed at timing (14). The effect effect ends (example of effect patterns A1 to A3).

In the case of the effect pattern A1, the second move object operation effect is not performed thereafter, and the challenge effect is performed at the timing (17). In the case of the effect pattern A2, the second flame effect effect is executed when the second standing motion of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (15), and the second tilting of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (16). The second flame effect effect ends when the action is performed. Then, at the timing (17), the challenge effect is entered. In the case of the effect pattern A3 illustrated in FIG. 59B, the lightning effect effect is executed when the second standing operation of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (15), and the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (16). When the second tilting movement is performed, the lightning effect effect ends. Then, at the timing (17), the challenge effect is entered.

Then, when it is determined that the fixed production symbols that are a combination of big hits are stopped and displayed as the variation display result of the effect symbols, it becomes a success mode at the timing (18) in the challenge effect, and as a result of the variable display. It is informed that the big hit game state will be controlled. When it is determined that the fixed effect design which is the reach-miss combination is stopped and displayed as the variation display result of the effect design, it becomes a failure mode at the timing (18) in the challenge effect, and the big hit game state may not be controlled. Be informed. In this way, the image of the reach result effect is displayed on the effect display device 5 at the timing (18), so that the reach result is notified. After that, when the reach result production ends, at the timing (19), the production display device 5 executes the stop symbol production as shown in FIG. 51(G), thereby performing the display for confirming the stop symbol of the production symbol. At the same time, the variable display ends.

(Other modifications)
In the above embodiment, the example in which the movable body motion effect related to the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2 is an effect to move the movable member 321 from the tilted position (first position) to the standing position (second position). Although explained, the gaming machine is not limited to such a form, and the gaming machine has a plurality of movable members, and by moving each movable member from the corresponding first position to the corresponding second position, each movable member becomes In a state in which the movable members are present at the respective second positions, the movable body united motion effect in which a specific form (united form) is formed by assembling the movable members may be executed. With the end of the movable body motion effect, each movable member moves from the corresponding second position to the first position, whereby the specific form (combined form) is released. It should be noted that the movable body combination operation effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 54.

Further, the movable body motion effect may be an effect in which the form of the movable member is changed, or may be an effect in which a predetermined operation, for example, a rotation mode operation is performed without changing the position of the movable member. For example, the movable body motion effect is an effect in which the movable member changes to an expansion/contraction mode, an effect to change to an open/closed mode, an effect to change to an expansion/contraction mode, or the movable member changes to another accessory (for example, The effect may be combined with an accessory that is fixed on the game board surface and does not operate.

In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the effect associated with the movable body action effect is the effect effect in which the effect image is superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001 in the effect display device 5, has been described. However, the effect is not limited to this. The effect linked with the movable body motion effect may be an effect of causing the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, the board side LEDs 9d, 9e, or the light emitting section 321A of the movable member 321 to emit light in a specific mode. For example, in the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, instead of the “flame effect effect”, the “top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, the board side LEDs 9d, 9e, or the light emitting section 321A is set to the first emission color (for example, "Blue light emission effect" is performed, and instead of the "lightning effect effect", the "top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, the board side LEDs 9d, 9e, or the light emitting section 321A is emitted in the second emission color (for example, red). It is advisable to execute "Production to emit light with".

Further, the effect linked with the movable body motion effect may be an effect of outputting a specific sound (a specific sound effect or a specific music piece) from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, in the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, instead of the "flame effect effect", "effects for outputting the first specific sound (for example, low-pitched sound effect sound) from the speakers 8L and 8R" is executed, Instead of the "lightning effect effect", it is preferable to execute "an effect that causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the second specific sound (for example, a sound effect having a high volume in the high sound range)".

Further, in the above-described embodiment, after the movable body motion effect and the effect effect executed in cooperation with the movable object motion effect, the challenge effect is executed on the effect display device 5, so that the predetermined state (probability change state or jackpot game state) is achieved. Although it is configured to notify whether or not the control is performed, the notification effect that notifies whether or not the predetermined state is achieved is not limited to such a form, and the notification effect that is performed in the movable body operation effect that was previously executed. It may be an effect of notifying whether or not a predetermined state is achieved depending on whether or not the movable member 321 or a movable member different from this is operated.

For example, when notifying that the predetermined state (probably changed state or big hit game state) is reached after the production of the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2 is completed, the movable member 321 is moved from the tilted position to the standing position. At the same time, a special image different from the flame effect image 1010 and the lightning effect image 1020 may be superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001.

In the above-described embodiment, when the movable body motion effect is executed a plurality of times like the effect patterns A2, A3, and B2, the first effect is generated when the first movable body motion effect is completed. An example has been described in which both the black image 1001 and the effect image that is the second effect are erased and the background image temporarily returns to the normal background image, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. For example, when the first moveable body motion effect is finished, the first effect image is erased, while the black image 1001 does not continuously return to the normal background image, and the second moveable body motion effect is produced. When is executed, the second effect image may be superimposed and displayed on the continuing black image 1001. With such a configuration, the player expects that the second movable body motion effect is executed because the black image 1001 continues even after the first movable body motion effect is completed. can do.

Furthermore, in the case of such a form, in the effect pattern (A1 and B1) in which the movable body motion effect is executed only once, the first movable body motion effect is finished and is superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001. The black image 1001 may be continued for a predetermined period (for example, until the challenge effect is entered) even after the effect image that has been deleted is deleted. By doing so, the interest of the player can be maintained for a predetermined period even after the end of the first movable body motion effect.

Further, when the black image 1001 as the first effect is displayed in advance before the first movable body motion effect is executed and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the movable member 321 is in the standing state). In addition, the first effect image may be superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001. Thus, the effect image may be displayed within the display period of the black image 1001 (the second effect is executed within the execution period of the first effect).

Further, when the first movable body motion effect is completed, both the black image 1001 and the first effect image are not continuously returned to the normal background image, and the second movable body motion effect is executed. In this case, the effect image superimposed and displayed on the continuous black image 1001 may be changed from the first effect image to the second effect image.

In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the period in which the movable member 321 is in the upright state and the period in which the effect image is displayed are the same has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the movable member 321 is tilted. The display of the effect image may be started within the movement period in which the movable member 321 moves from the position to the standing position or before the movement period. The display of the effect image may be ended after the period. "The effect effect is executed in accordance with the operation of the movable member 321" means that "the movable member 321 starts to move from the tilted position to the standing position and then becomes the standing state, and further moves from the standing position to the tilted position. It is sufficient that at least a part of the "period until the end of" and at least a part of the "period during which the effect image is displayed" overlap.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, by the effect of the mode in which the movable body operation effect and the effect effect are linked, it is suggested whether or not the probability variation control is performed after the end of the big hit game state, or the variable display of the effect symbol is ended. It was suggested that whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled after the display result is derived and displayed, but it is not limited to such a form, and whether or not a special reach effect is performed is suggested. It may be one that indicates whether or not the variable display (the special figure game that is held) in which the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied is controlled to the jackpot gaming state ( It may be a so-called look-ahead notice presentation).

Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) As in the battle reach effect shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 53(A) and the story reach effect shown in FIG. 52 and FIG. Depending on which kind of effect display is performed at one time, an effect effect display in which an effect image is superimposed and displayed on a black image, and an effect effect display in which an effect image is superimposed and displayed on an effect image Since it is possible to display the effect effect display in a different mode, it is possible to enhance the effect effect in which the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display unit are linked.

(2) As shown in FIG. 51(E) and FIG. 53(A), a specific type of effect display such as a battle reach effect in which a movable object effect for operating a movable object such as the movable member 321 is executed is executed. At this time, the effect of superimposing the effect effect display of the specific mode such as the particle effect image 71 of FIGS. 51D and 51E on the effect display of the specific type such as the display of the victory effect image is executed. Since it is possible, it is possible to link a specific type of effect display in which the movable body effect is executed with an effect display on a display means such as the effect display device 5, and to display the movable object by the specific type of effect display. It is possible to further enhance the effect effect in which the operation and the effect effect display of the display unit are linked.

(3) As shown in FIG. 52(E) and FIG. 53(B), a specific kind of effect display such as story reach effect is executed in which a movable object effect for operating a movable object such as the movable member 321 is executed. 52D and (E), the effect display in a specific mode such as the flame effect image 73 is displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 5 such as the black image 72. Since it is possible to execute the effect to be superimposedly displayed on the display, it is possible to link the predetermined effect of the predetermined type in which the movable object effect is executed and the effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 5. In addition, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by emphasizing the movable body effect.

(4) When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable body, like the initial operation in the movable member initialization process of step S51B of FIG. 39, and step S51A of FIG. 39. , The running-in operation of moving the movable body is performed as in the operation in the running-in process of the movable member in FIG. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the movement of the movable body from being unfamiliar and affecting the movement of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable body from not operating properly.

The gaming machine described above also has the following characteristic configuration.
(1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine),
A movable object (for example, a movable member 321) movable to a standby position (for example, a first position shown in FIGS. 31 and 32) and an advance position (for example, a second position shown in FIGS. 31 and 32),
When the gaming machine is started, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable object (for example, an initial operation in the movable member initialization process of step S51B in FIG. 39, and an initial operation) and the movable object And a control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for performing a running-in operation (for example, step S51A of FIG. 39, an operation in the running-in process of the movable member of FIG. 41, also referred to as a short initial operation).

According to such a configuration, the confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable object and the running-in operation of moving the movable object are executed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable object from being unfamiliar and affecting the movement of the movable object. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing that the movable object does not operate well.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
When an abnormality is detected in the operation of the movable object in the running-in operation, an error processing unit (for example, step S513 and step S517 in FIG. 41) that executes error processing (for example, notification of abnormality) is further provided.

With such a configuration, when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the movable object by the running-in operation, the error processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute processing corresponding to the state in which the movable object does not operate normally.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The control means executes the running-in operation before the checking operation (see, for example, FIG. 39).

With such a configuration, the break-in operation is executed before the confirmation operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable object from not operating properly in the confirmation operation.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
When an abnormality is detected in the operation of the movable object in the running-in operation, the control unit prohibits the confirmation operation (for example, until the notification stop operation is performed in steps S514 and S518 in FIG. 41). , The movable member initialization process of step S51B in FIG. 39 is not executed).

With such a configuration, if an abnormality is detected in the operation of the movable object during the running-in operation, the execution of the checking operation is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the confirmation operation from being executed while the movable object is not operating normally.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The movable object is moved to the advanced position by different power sources during the game and during the running-in operation.

According to such a configuration, the movable object is moved to the advanced position by different power sources during the game and during the running-in operation. As a result, the running-in operation can be executed with a suitable power source.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5) above,
The movable object is an elastic body (for example, a tension spring 323. It may be another elastic body such as a spiral spring, a leaf spring, or a rubber) during a game, and is moved from the elastic body during the running-in operation. A powerful motor (for example, the second effect motor 330) is used as a power source to move to the advance position.

According to such a configuration, a motor having a stronger breaking-in action than the elastic body is used as the power source of the movable object. As a result, it is possible to more reliably move the movable object to the advanced position during the break-in operation.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The movable object includes an electric cable (for example, a cable 361) that bends and stretches as the movable object moves,
The running-in operation is an operation in which the movable object is moved to bend and stretch the electric cable to run in.

According to such a configuration, a confirming operation for confirming the operation of the movable object and a running-in operation of moving the movable object to bend and stretch the electric cable to make it acclimate. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movement of the electric cable from being unfamiliar and affecting the movement of the movable object. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable object from not operating properly.

(8) In the gaming machine of (7) above,
The electric cable is provided near an object that generates heat (for example, the LCD of the effect display device 5, the first effect motor 303, and the second effect motor 330).

With such a configuration, the electric cable becomes more flexible due to heat. As a result, the movable object can be moved more reliably.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, the running-in operation is an operation of moving the movable object to bend and stretch the electric cable to run in. However, the present invention is not limited to this, when the movable object is configured to move along the rail, when the movable object is configured to move by a ball screw or a linear guide, and when the movable object is a slide bearing. When a bearing such as a metal bearing, a resin bearing, or the like is configured to perform an operation such as rotation, the operation may be such that the lubricant such as oil or grease is moved so that the lubricant is familiar to the operator. In addition, when the movable object has a sliding portion such as rotation or linear movement, it may be an operation of moving the fixing of the sliding portion to make it smooth and acclimate.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, the break-in operation is performed at startup. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the break-in operation may be periodically performed during a demo in which a game is not performed after being activated. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the movable object from not operating properly during the game.

(11) The cable 361 according to the above-described embodiment supplies power to the LED. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and supplies electric power or a control signal to other electric parts (for example, an actuator such as a motor or solenoid that moves a movable object or a display device such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) that displays an image). May be

(12) The cable 361 may be a flexible flat cable, a flat cable in which a plurality of covered wires are arranged and fused, a single wire, a stranded wire, or a twisted wire. It may be a pair of lines.

(13) In the above-described embodiment, the running-in operation and the checking operation are performed separately. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the running-in operation and the checking operation may be executed as a series of operations.

(14) In the above-described embodiment, the initial position of the movable object is detected in the confirmation operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial position of the movable object may be detected during the running-in operation. The initial position of the movable object may be detected separately from the running-in operation and the checking operation.

The embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention can be made even if changes or additions are made without departing from the scope of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is a gaming machine. The number of balls used for the game is subtracted, while the number of balls used for the game is added, while the number of balls that are circulated inside and lent out according to the player's lending request and the number of prize balls given according to the prize are added. The present invention can be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine that is stored by being stored. It should be noted that in these enclosed gaming machines, since points and points are given to the player instead of the game balls, these given points and points correspond to the game value. It can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B variably display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol which is the variable display result, and then the final stop symbol. Although it is designed to be stopped and displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the variable display of plural kinds of special symbols without including the final stop symbol which is the variable display result, the final stop symbol is stopped. It may be displayed. That is, the final stop symbol which is the variable display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for the variable display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the production control microcomputer of the variation pattern indicating the variation time and the variation pattern such as the type of reach production and the presence/absence of pseudo-relation, one variation is set at the time of starting the variation. Although the example of transmitting the variation pattern command has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first command such as presence/absence of pseudo-relationship and presence/absence of sliding effect before reaching reach (so-called when not reaching. A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of the reach and the presence/absence of the re-lottery effect, etc. after the reach (so-called the first when the reach is not reached). You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation|variation time of (after 2 stop) and a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. Note that the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the variation time by each of two commands, and the effect control microcomputer selects the specific variation mode executed at each timing. May be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt (In) the second command may be transmitted. It should be noted that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the variation pattern by using two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command.

Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only the ratio being different due to the relationship such as A:B=70%:30% or A:B=30%:70%. It is a concept that also includes a relationship such that A:B=100%:0% and the ratio is different (that is, one is 100% allocation and the other is 0% allocation).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the production control board 12, the sound control board 13, the drive control board 16B, the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F, and the like are provided as the boards on which the circuits for controlling the production device are mounted. However, a circuit for controlling the effect device may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) having a circuit for controlling the effect display device 5 and the like, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (a movable body, a light emitter, a speaker, etc.) are installed. You may make it provide two boards, a 2nd production|generation control board.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 directly sends the command to the effect control microcomputer, but the game control microcomputer 100 sends the effect control command to another board. However, it may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer in the effect control board 12 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or control related to the movable body, the light-emitting body, the speaker, etc. may be executed, and the received command may be directly or, for example, a simplified command. It may be changed and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer that controls the effect display device 5. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer performs display control according to the received command in the same manner as the display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 100 in the above-described embodiment. It can be performed.

Further, in the above embodiment, there are probability variation big hit and normal big hit as the big hit type, and based on the fact that it was decided as the probability variation big hit as the big hit type, the gaming machine controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit game has been shown. , But is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (the probability variable area may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable prize balls may be provided). Probability variation area may be provided in part of the device), the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game, and the big hit game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in the probable variation state after the end.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 side performs the display result (whether it is a big hit or not) and the variation pattern type winning determination (prefetch determination), and the command indicating the winning determination result (design) (Specified command, variation category command), and the case where the pre-reading notice effect is executed on the side of the effect control microcomputer based on the command indicating the winning determination result, but not limited to such an aspect, For example, the effect control microcomputer may be configured to perform a winning determination (prefetch determination). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a command designating only the value of the random number extracted when the start winning is generated, and the random numbers designated by these commands on the production control microcomputer side. The winning determination (prefetch determination) may be performed based on the value of.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the scope of the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

[2. Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described.
The second embodiment is a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes a light emission effect that causes the LED 9 to emit light. Needless to say, the embodiments to which the present invention is applicable are not limited to the embodiments described below.

In this embodiment, the production control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controls the left frame LED 9b, the top frame LED 9a, and the right frame LED 9c via the serial-parallel conversion circuit described in the first embodiment, and these LEDs 9 are displayed. The lighting effect is executed by turning on and off.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal in the serial-parallel conversion circuit in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, 12-channel drive output terminals are applied to the light emitter drivers 413a, 413a, and 413c corresponding to the left frame LED 9b, the top frame LED 9a, and the right frame LED 9c, respectively. These serial-parallel conversion circuits are configured to disperse the output timings of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 to spread the spectrum and prevent the generation of radiation noise to suppress radio wave radiation. ..

In this embodiment, the internal oscillation clock circuit incorporated in the serial-parallel conversion circuit outputs a 6 MHz clock signal as in the above-described embodiments. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, the internal clock signal of 6 MHz is separated into three-phase clock signals of 1 MHz, and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are grouped into three groups of four channels per group, Distribute the signal output timing.

Specifically, the four channels of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 form a group 1, the four channels of the drive output terminals Q4 to Q7 form a group 2, and the four channels of the drive output terminals Q8 to Q11 form a group 3 Composed. The drive output terminals in the same group (for example, drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 in group 1) have the same signal output timing, but drive output terminals in different groups (for example, drive output in group 1). The output timing is distributed between the terminal Q0 and the drive output terminal Q4) of the group 2.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the configuration shown in FIG. 17 is applied to the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to each of the light emitter drivers 413a, 413a and 413c.

In the present embodiment, a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is applied and drive output terminals are grouped into three groups of four channels, but a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is described. Alternatively, the drive output terminals may be divided into 6 groups of 4 channels per group.

It is also possible to configure a serial-parallel conversion circuit having more than 24 channels in the same manner and divide the drive output terminals into a plurality of groups for each channel of a specified number. is there.

In the following, the term "time" indicates a time width (length of time). Further, the term “period” indicates a continuous time range from one timing to another timing. Further, the term “cycle” refers to the constant time when the same phenomenon is repeated at constant time intervals.

FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the principle of light emission effect in the present embodiment.
The CPU 120 for effect control performs an effect effect lottery by using an effect effect distribution table 1212 described later and executes the effect effect.

In this embodiment, at the timing when the reach state occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as "reach state generation timing"), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect control relay board 16A and the light emitter control boards 16D and 16E. , 16F, the left frame LED 9b, the top frame LED 9a, and the right frame LED 9c are caused to emit light, respectively, to execute a light emission effect.

In the present embodiment, the production control CPU 120 emits light with a light emission pattern (first pattern) that causes the LED 9 to emit a single color (specific color) and a light emission pattern (second pattern) that causes the LED 9 to emit a plurality of colors. Can be executed, and the feature is that the jackpot reliability is different and the effect period is different between the first pattern and the second pattern. Here, for simplification of the explanation, the jackpot reliability is set to "low" indicating that the reliability is low, "medium" indicating that the reliability is medium, and "high" indicating that the reliability is high. The principle is divided into four types, “highest” indicating that the reliability is highest.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of the light emission effect in the present embodiment.
This figure shows a timing chart showing an example of control of light emission effect in a specific super reach effect, and shows an example of control of light emission effect in the battle reach effect.

In the following description, the timing at which the light emission effect starts is referred to as “light emission effect start timing”, and the timing at which the light emission effect ends is referred to as “light emission effect end timing”. In addition, in the present embodiment, the emission colors of “blue” and “red” that are monochromatic emission colors and the emission color of “rainbow color” that is the emission color expressed by a plurality of colors are illustrated.

When the battle reach effect is executed, from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) to the time of occurrence of the reach state, the effect symbol is in the effect mode of the normal variable display as shown in FIG. 51(A). Is displayed on the effect display device 5.

In the effect display device 5, when the reach state occurs at the time “tm1”, as shown in FIGS. 51B and 51C, the message image 53 is displayed and the battle effect corresponding to the battle reach effect is displayed. The moving image of is displayed. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 starts the execution of the light emission effect in response to the occurrence of the reach state. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission effect start timing is the timing (time “tm1”) at which the reach state occurs.

As described above, in the variable display of the effect symbols, the variable display of the effect symbols is simultaneously started in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", for example, "left". According to a predetermined stop order such as "," "right", "middle", the variable display of the effect symbols is sequentially stopped in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5R, 5C, and finally the effect is effected in all the effect symbol display areas. The variable display ends when the symbols stop and the display result is derived and displayed.

After the variation display of the effect symbols is started at the same time, as shown in FIG. 51(A), when the left and right effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R are stopped, when the same symbol is stopped, the reach is reached. It becomes a state. The effect control CPU 120 measures the elapsed time from the start of the change by a timer or the like, and when the elapsed time reaches the time from the start of the change that is predetermined for the change pattern to the occurrence of the reach state, starts the light emission effect. The timing is determined, and the execution of the light emission effect is started.

FIG. 61A shows an example in which the jackpot reliability is lower than in the cases of (B) and (C), and the variation display result is “miss”. In this example, a case where the execution of the light emission effect is ended at the time “tn1” during the battle reach effect is shown. That is, the light emission effect end timing is time “tn1”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “tn1”. Further, in this case, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LED 9 to emit light of the emission color A. The luminescent color A in this case may be a luminescent color of a single color, and may be a luminescent color (for example, blue) indicating that the jackpot reliability is low.

Here, the light emission effect period is determined based on the jackpot reliability in the variation. Specifically, the higher the jackpot reliability, the longer the light emission effect period is controlled. The light emission effect period indicates a continuous time range from the light emission effect start timing to the light emission effect end timing.

FIG. 61B shows an example in which the jackpot reliability is higher than in the case of (A), but lower than in the case of (C), and the variation display result is “miss”. In this example, the case where the execution of the light emission effect is ended at the time "tn2 (>tn1)" during the battle reach effect is shown. That is, the light emission effect end timing is time "tn2", and the light emission effect period is a period from time "tm1" to "tn2". In addition, in this case, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LED 9 to emit light of the emission color B. In this case, the emission color B may be a single emission color, and may be an emission color (for example, green) indicating that the jackpot reliability is medium.

FIG. 61C shows an example in which the jackpot reliability is higher than in the cases of (A) and (B), but lower than that in the case of (D), and the variation display result is “miss”. There is. In this example, the case where the execution of the light emission effect is ended at the time “tn3 (>tn2)” in the reach result effect executed after the battle reach effect is shown. That is, the light emission effect end timing is time "tn3", and the light emission effect period is a period from time "tm1" to "tn3". Further, in this case, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LED 9 to emit light of the emission color C. The luminescent color C in this case may be a luminescent color (eg, red) indicating that the jackpot reliability is high.

FIG. 61(D) shows an example in which the jackpot reliability is the highest and the variation display result is “big hit”. In this example, after the reach result effect after the battle reach effect, the case where the execution of the light emission effect is ended at the time "tn4 (>tn3)" at which the variable display of the special symbol ends in the stop symbol effect executed last Showing. That is, the light emission effect end timing is time “tn4”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “tn4”. Further, in this case, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LED 9 to emit light in the special emission color. In this case, the special emission color may be a special color (for example, rainbow color) indicating that the jackpot reliability is “highest”.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the light emission effect, the LED 9 starts light emission (light emission effect start timing) in common (for example, when the reach state occurs), but the light emission end timing (light emission effect end timing). By making them different, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation. In other words, the higher the jackpot expectation, the longer the light emission continues, so the player can expect a big hit and have a feeling of uplifting.

In addition, when the variable display result of the special symbol becomes the display result corresponding to the big hit, by causing the player to have a special expectation by executing the light emission effect by the light emission pattern that causes the LED 9 to emit light with the special light emission color. You can

In the present embodiment, the left frame LED 9b, the top frame LED 9a, and the right frame LED 9c are made to emit light to achieve the light emission effect, but all of the plurality of LEDs 9 emit the same light emission color. May be performed, or the plurality of LEDs 9 may be caused to emit light in different colors. In the following, a case where light emission is performed in different emission colors will be exemplified.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a table configuration of a light emission pattern table 1211 which is a table which is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 and which defines the light emission pattern of the LED 9 for realizing the light emission effect in the present embodiment. ..

In the light emission pattern table 1211, for example, categories, light emission patterns, electric components, light emission types, light emission colors, and light emission effect times (millisecond ms) are defined in association with each other.

The category defines a category in which the light emission patterns are classified. In the present embodiment, light emission patterns having the same emission color of the top frame LED 9 (hereinafter, referred to as “top frame emission color”) are set as the same category, and the head numbers of the emission patterns (LP1, LP2, LP3, LP4, ...) to distinguish.
In the light emission pattern, the number of the light emission pattern of the LED 9 applied in the light emission effect is determined according to the category.
In the light emitting pattern, the types of the LEDs 9 to be made to emit light (the left frame LED 9b, the top frame LED 9a, and the right frame LED 9c) are defined for the electrical components.

The type of light emission defines the type of light emission pattern of each electric component in the light emission pattern. This emission type includes “continuous”, which indicates continuous emission of the same color (hereinafter, “continuous emission”), and “switching” which indicates that multiple colors are switched (changed) to emit light. "," blinking" indicating that blinking is performed by turning on/off one color, and the like are included. Continuous light emission means that lighting is performed continuously (continuously) without interruption.

As the luminescent color, a color that causes each electric component to emit light is defined in the luminescent pattern. This emission color includes colors such as "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow".

As the light emission effect time, a time width (length of time) in which the light emission pattern is applied to execute the light emission effect is defined. Specifically, for the light emission patterns belonging to the same category, an appropriate light emission effect time corresponding to the variation display time of the variation pattern is set in association with each variation pattern described in FIG. 63. The light emission effect time is a time for causing the LED 9 to emit light starting from the light emission effect start timing described above. Since the light emission effect time differs for each light emission pattern, the light emission effect end timing changes according to the light emission pattern.

As can be seen from FIG. 62, in the light emission pattern table 1211, for the light emission patterns of the same category, the light emission pattern for causing each LED 9 to emit light in the same mode and the light emission pattern for each LED 9 in different modes. The emission pattern to be emitted is defined. By doing so, it is possible to realize a plurality of variations of the light emission effect, enhance the effect of the light emission effect, and improve the enjoyment of the game.

63, in the present embodiment, the light emission effect distribution table 1212 stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 and having the allocation for the effect control CPU 120 to select the light emission pattern defined in the light emission pattern table 1211. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of.

FIG. 63(A) shows a departure time light emission effect distribution table 1212A which is a distribution table at the time of loss, and FIG. 63(B) shows a normal big hit time light emission effect distribution table 1212B which is a distribution table at the time of normal big hit. FIG. 63C shows a normal big hit time light emission effect distribution table 1212C which is a distribution table at the time of probability variation big hit, and these tables show fluctuation pattern types, fluctuation patterns, and fluctuation pattern allocations. , Light emission pattern allocation are defined in association with each other.

As the variation pattern type, the variation pattern type designated by the variation pattern type designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is defined.
In the fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern belonging to the fluctuation pattern type and designated by a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main board 11 is defined. In the figure, the content of the variation pattern and the variation display time are shown in parentheses.
In the variation pattern distribution, the rate at which the variation pattern is selected is set.
For the light emission pattern allocation, the ratio of the light emission patterns of the categories (LP1, LP2, LP3, LP4,...) Corresponding to the skylight emission color among the light emission patterns determined in the light emission pattern table 1211 is determined. Has been.

This will be specifically described.
In the out-light emission effect distribution table 1212A of FIG. 63(A), "normal variation out", "normal reach out" and "super reach out" are defined as the variation pattern types.
In the fluctuation pattern type “normal fluctuation deviation”, fluctuation patterns are defined as “normal fluctuation deviation (7 seconds)” and “normal fluctuation deviation (15 seconds)”.
In the variation pattern type “out of normal reach”, “out of normal reach (20 seconds)” and “normal reach (30 seconds)” are defined as the variation patterns.
In the variation pattern type “Super-reach miss”, the variation pattern is defined as “first super-reach (battle effect) miss (40 seconds)” and “second super-reach (story effect) miss (50 seconds)”. There is.

The fluctuation pattern is assigned as "60%" for the fluctuation pattern "deviation in normal fluctuation (7 seconds)", "20%" for fluctuation pattern "deviation in normal fluctuation (15 seconds)", and fluctuation pattern "normal reach". "9%" for "out of bounds (20 seconds)", "6%" for fluctuation pattern "out of normal reach (30 seconds)", to "1st super reach (battle effect) off (40 seconds)" Is set to "3%", and the variation pattern "2nd super reach (story production) out of bounds (50 seconds)" is set to "2%", and the total of these ratios is "100%".

In the light emission pattern allocation, “0%” is set for all of the fluctuation patterns included in the fluctuation pattern types “normal fluctuation deviation” and “normal reach deviation”, respectively. On the other hand, regarding the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type “Super Reach Loss”, blue “70%” and green “20%” are included in the variation pattern “First Super Reach (Battle production) Loss (40 seconds)”. However, red "10%" and rainbow "0%" are defined, and blue "65%" is green in the variation pattern "2nd super reach (story production) missed (50 seconds)". "25%", red "10%", and rainbow "0%" are defined.

In the off-time light emission effect distribution table 1212A, the light emission pattern allocations are all set to "0%" for the fluctuation pattern types "normal fluctuation deviation" and "normal reach deviation". Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the light emission effect in the case of deviation due to normal fluctuation and deviation from normal reach. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern type “out of super reach”, values are set in the light emission pattern allocation so that blue>green>red, and the ratio of blue accounts for the majority. ing. For this reason, the ratio of executing the light emission effect that causes the LED 9 to emit blue light is the highest. Also, "rainbow" is set to "0%". Therefore, the light emission effect of causing the LED 9 to emit a rainbow color is not executed.

In the normal big hit light emission effect distribution table 1212B of FIG. 63(B), "normal reach big hit" and "super reach big hit" are defined as the variation pattern types.
In the variation pattern type “normal reach jackpot”, “normal reach jackpot (20 seconds)” and “normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)” are defined as the variation patterns.
The variation pattern types “first super reach (battle production) big hit (40 seconds)” and “second super reach (story production) big hit (50 seconds)” are defined.

The fluctuation patterns are assigned as "5%" for the fluctuation pattern "normal reach jackpot (20 seconds)", "10%" for the fluctuation pattern "normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)", and as the fluctuation pattern "first super reach ( "40%" is set for the "battle production) jackpot (40 seconds)" and "45%" is set for the variation pattern "second super reach (story production) jackpot (50 seconds)". If you add up, it becomes "100%".

In the light emission pattern allocation, “0%” is set for all the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type “normal reach big hit”. On the other hand, in the variation pattern "1st super reach (battle production) jackpot (40 seconds)" included in the variation pattern type "1st super reach (battle production) jackpot (40 seconds)", blue "20%" Green "30%", red "30%", and rainbow "20%" are set, and blue "15" is set in the variation pattern "2nd super reach (story production) big hit (50 seconds)". %, green is 35%, red is 30%, and rainbow is 20%.

In the normal big hit time light emission effect distribution table 1212B, all the light emission pattern allocations for the variation pattern type “normal reach big hit” are “0%”. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the light emission effect in the case of the normal reach big hit. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern type “super reach big hit”, the light emission pattern allocation is set to a value such that the ratio of green and red is relatively high. Therefore, the ratio of executing the light emission effect of causing the LED 9 to emit green or red light is relatively high.

In the probability variation big hit light emission effect distribution table 1212C of FIG. 63(C), "normal reach big hit" and "super reach big hit" are defined as the variation pattern types.
In the variation pattern type “normal reach jackpot”, “normal reach jackpot (20 seconds)” and “normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)” are defined as the variation patterns.
The variation pattern types “first super reach (battle production) big hit (40 seconds)” and “second super reach (story production) big hit (50 seconds)” are defined.

The variation patterns are assigned as “1%” for the variation pattern “normal reach jackpot (20 seconds)”, “4%” for the variation pattern “normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)”, and as the variation pattern “first super reach ( "40%" is set for the "battle production) big hit (40 seconds)" and "55%" is set for the variation pattern "second super reach (story production) big hit (50 seconds)". If you add up, it becomes "100%".

In the light emission pattern allocation, “0%” is set for all the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type “normal reach big hit”. On the other hand, in the variation pattern "1st super reach (battle production) jackpot (40 seconds)" included in the variation pattern type "1st super reach (battle production) jackpot (40 seconds)", blue "5%" Green "25%", red "40%", and rainbow "30%" are set, and blue "1" is set in the variation pattern "2nd super reach (story production) big hit (50 seconds)". %, green is 29%, red is 40%, and rainbow is 30%.

In the probability variation big hit light emission effect distribution table 1212C, all the light emission pattern allocations for the variation pattern type "normal reach big hit" are "0%". Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the light emission effect in the case of the normal reach big hit. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern type “super reach big hit”, the values are set in the light emission pattern allocation so that the ratios of red and iridescent are relatively high. Therefore, the ratio of executing the light emission effect of causing the LED 9 to emit red or iridescent light is relatively high.

Based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 11, the effect control CPU 120 follows the allocation determined by the corresponding variation pattern in the above-described light emission effect distribution table 1212 and emits light from the ceiling. Select a color. Then, among the light emission patterns defined in the light emission pattern table 1211 of FIG. 62, which are included in the category of the selected top frame emission color, the light emission pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is selected, The light emission pattern used for the light emission effect is determined.

Here, the jackpot reliability is defined as "occupancy rate in jackpot variation in overall appearance rate including both jackpot variation and out-of-range variation" for a plurality of light emission patterns. From the light emission pattern allocation determined in the light emission effect distribution table 1212 described above, the occupancy rate corresponding to the luminescent color “blue” is generally a big hit reliability “low”, and the occupancy rate corresponding to the light emitting color “green” is a big hit reliability. Occupancy rates corresponding to "medium" and emission color "red" correspond to jackpot reliability "high", and occupation rates corresponding to emission color "rainbow" correspond to jackpot reliability "highest".

It should be noted that, although the description has been given here as to selecting the category of the light emission pattern based on the light emission color of the top frame, this is merely an example, and the light emission color of the left frame LED 9b (left frame light emission color) or the light emission of the right frame LED 9c. The light emission pattern table 1211 and the light emission effect distribution table 1212 may be set such that the category of the light emission pattern is selected based on the color (right frame light emission color).

Further, in the light emission effect distribution table 1212 described above, the light emission pattern allocation is set to “0%” for the variation pattern types of normal variation, normal reach variation, and normal reach jackpot, but the emission color is the same as the variation pattern type of super reach. The allocation may be determined for each.

64 is a diagram showing an example of a table configuration of a light emission control table 1213 that is stored in the ROM 121 of the production control board 12 and is used by the production control CPU 120 to perform the light emission control of the LEDs 9 in the present embodiment.
In the light emission control table 1213, for example, a light emission pattern, a driver ID, an output terminal number, electrical parts, and light emission control generation data are defined in association with each other.

In the light emission pattern, each light emission pattern defined in the light emission pattern table 1211 is stored.
The driver ID stores an ID (in the present embodiment, “D1”, “D2”, and “D3”) as identification information for identifying each of the light emitter drivers 413a, 413b, and 413c.
The output terminal number stores the output terminal number of the light emitter driver 413 (00 to 11 in this embodiment).
In the electric components, the light emitter driver 413 and the electric components corresponding to the output terminal numbers (in the present embodiment, “left frame”, “top frame”, “right frame”) are stored.
The light emission control generation data is data for controlling the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the light emitter driver, and is used for generating the light emission control data based on the control data format described in FIG. The data is stored.

65 and 66 are diagrams showing an example of the data structure of the light emission control generation data included in the light emission control table 1213.
Each light emission control generation data includes, for example, a data name, a format type, an address, a data transmission cycle, a unit light emission time, a light emission control cycle, and format data.

The data name stores the data name of the format generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern of the light emission control table 1213.
The format type stores identification information (“basic” or “extended”) of which of the basic format (EX=0) and the extended format (EX=1) shown in FIG. 8 is to be applied. It

As the address, the address set in the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the light emitter driver is stored.
In the data transmission cycle, a cycle of transmitting light emission control data from the effect control board 12 to the light emitter driver 413 of each light emitter control board via the effect control relay board 16A is stored. In the present embodiment, this data transmission cycle will be described as 10 ms (milliseconds).
The unit light emission time stores the unit time for causing the LED 9 corresponding to the light emitter driver to emit light.

In the light emission control cycle, a time (hereinafter, this cycle is referred to as “light emission control cycle”) which is a control unit of light emission for one cycle is stored. The light emission control cycle differs depending on the light emission type. Specifically, when the light emission type is “continuous” or “blinking”, a time such as “100 ms” can be set, and the light emission type is “switch” (special light emission color ( In the case of (rainbow color) light emission, etc.), a time such as “1800 ms” can be set in advance. Details will be described later.

The format data stores time-series Q data to be included in the emission control data by applying the format of the format type. Specifically, in the format data, the light emission order and the Q data corresponding to the RGB values corresponding to the light emission order are determined in association with each other.

In the present embodiment, it will be described that the light emission of the LED 9 is controlled by the Q data (hexadecimal number, RGB color value) expressed in hexadecimal. In the color hexadecimal number, each of RGB is represented by two hexadecimal numbers (0 to F) of two digits to represent “16×16=256 gradations”. The same numerical values are used for each RGB, and each RGB is represented by one digit with a total of three digits omitted. Further, for simplification, the notation of “0x” representing a hexadecimal number is omitted and illustrated and described.

In the Q data, Q data targeted for group 1 and Q data targeted for group 2 are used as Q data output to the serial-parallel conversion circuit forming the light emitter driver 413 corresponding to the address. Q data for group 3 is included. The Q data corresponding to each group stores RGB values output from the four output terminals Q included in the group.

Specifically, regarding RGB values as output data, in group 1, Q0 corresponds to R value (R), Q1 corresponds to G value (G), and Q2 corresponds to B value (B). Since Q3 is connected to the ground, there is no (-). In group 2, Q4 corresponds to the R value (R), Q5 corresponds to the G value (G), and Q6 corresponds to the B value (B). Since Q7 is connected to the ground, there is no (-). In Group 3, Q8 corresponds to the R value (R), Q9 corresponds to the G value (G), and Q10 corresponds to the B value (B). Q11 is not (-) because it is connected to the solenoid 500.

This will be specifically described.
The light emission control generation data shown at the top of FIG. 65 is data having a data name “dat1-1-a”.
The format type is “basic”, and it is defined that the basic format of FIG. 8(2) is applied.
The address is “08”, and it is defined that the address is applied to the light emitter driver 413b corresponding to the left frame LED 9b.
The data transmission cycle is “10 ms”, and it is specified that the performance control board 12 transmits data to the light emitter driver 413b every 10 ms.
The unit light emission time is "100 ms", and it is defined that the left frame LED 9b emits light for a unit light emission time of 100 ms.
The light emission control cycle is "100 ms". The light emission type of the light emission pattern is “continuous”, and in order to perform continuous light emission of a specific color, the same time as the unit light emission time is set as the light emission control cycle.

In the format data, the order of light emission is defined as “1” to “N”. Further, “0, 0, F” is set as the Q data (RGB value) of each group for each of the light emission orders “1” to “N”. Since the R value and G value of the Q data are set to “0” and the B value is set to “F” for all the light emission orders, continuous blue light emission is realized.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing another example of the light emission control generation data.
The light emission control generation data is data having a data name of "dat4-1-a".
The format type is “basic”, and it is defined that the basic format of FIG. 8(2) is applied.
The address is “08”, and it is defined that the address is applied to the light emitter driver 413b corresponding to the left frame LED 9b.
The data transmission cycle is “10 ms”, and it is defined that the effect control board 12 repeatedly transmits data to the light emitter driver 413b at a cycle of 10 ms.
The unit light emission time is “40 ms”, and it is defined that the left frame LED 9b emits light in the unit light emission time of 40 ms.
The light emission control cycle is “120 ms”. The light emission type of the light emission pattern is “switching”, and in order to emit iridescent light by switching (changing) three colors of red, green, and blue, a time three times as long as the unit light emission time 40 ms is set as the light emission control cycle. It is set.

In the format data, the order of light emission is defined as “1” to “M”. In the light emission order “1”, “F, 0, 0” is defined as Q data (RGB value) of each group, and in the light emission order “2”, Q data (RGB value) of each group is “0, F, 0" is set, "0, 0, F" is set as the Q data (RGB value) of each group in the light emission order "3", and Q data of each group is set in the light emission order "4". “F, 0, 0” is defined as the (RGB value). The same applies hereinafter. As a result, red light emission, green light emission, and blue light emission are performed at each unit light emission time of 40 ms. As a result, the player can visually recognize the rainbow-colored light emission.

FIG. 67 is a timing chart showing an example of a light emitting pattern in the present embodiment and a temporal change of RGB values corresponding to each light emitting pattern.
FIG. 67(1) shows an example in which the LED 9 continuously emits a single color of blue as the light emission pattern A corresponding to the big hit reliability “low”. In this example, the R value and the G value are set to “0”, and the B value is set to “F”, thereby realizing continuous light emission of monochromatic blue. Δts in the figure is the above-described data transmission cycle, which is, for example, 10 ms. Further, Δtm in the figure is the above-described unit light emission time, which is, for example, 100 ms. Here, in order to realize continuous light emission with the light emission type being “continuous”, it is shown as “continuous unit light emission time”.

FIG. 67(2) shows an example in which the LED 9 continuously emits a single color of green, which corresponds to the jackpot reliability “medium”, as the light emission pattern B. In this example, the R value and the B value are set to "0", and the G value is set to "F", so that continuous monochromatic green light emission is realized. Δts in the figure is the above-described data transmission cycle, which is, for example, 10 ms. Further, Δtm in the figure is the above-described unit light emission time, which is, for example, 100 ms. Here, in order to realize continuous light emission with the light emission type being “continuous”, it is shown as “continuous unit light emission time”.

FIG. 67(3) shows an example in which the LED 9 continuously emits a single color of green, which corresponds to the jackpot reliability “high”, as the light emission pattern C. In this example, the G value and the B value are set to "0" and the R value is set to "F", thereby realizing continuous light emission of monochromatic red. Δts in the figure is the above-described data transmission cycle, which is, for example, 10 ms. Further, Δtm in the figure is the above-described unit light emission time, which is, for example, 100 ms. Here, in order to realize continuous light emission with the light emission type being “continuous”, it is shown as “continuous unit light emission time”.

FIG. 67(4) shows an example in which the LED 9 emits a rainbow color corresponding to the jackpot reliability “maximum” as the emission pattern D. In this example, each of the RGB values is changed in the switching unit light emission time Δtn in the order of “F”→“0”→“F”→“0”,... Has been realized. Δts in the figure is the above-described data transmission cycle, which is, for example, 10 ms. Further, Δts in the figure is the above-described unit light emission time, which is, for example, 40 ms. Here, in order to realize switching light emission with the light emission type being “switching”, it is shown as “switching unit light emission time”.

In the light emission patterns A to C, monochromatic colors of blue, green, and red are continuously emitted, whereas in the light emission pattern D, a rainbow color is expressed by sequentially changing red → green → blue. Therefore, the continuous light emission time as a single color is shorter than the light emission patterns A to C. Also, focusing on the unit light emission time, the switching unit light emission time Δtn in the light emission pattern D is shorter than the continuous unit light emission time Δtm corresponding to the light emission patterns A to C.

Note that, in the above-described light emission pattern, for example, the light emission pattern A may be made to continuously emit light not in blue but in white by setting the RGB values to their maximum values.

Next, control data for controlling the gradation of the LEDs and realizing light emission by color mixing will be described. The Q data (RGB values) in the gradation control data described here can be directly applied to the Q data of the format data included in the light emission control generation data.

FIG. 68 illustrates an example of grayscale control data that is control data for performing grayscale control for realizing iridescent light emission.
In this gradation control data, the leftmost column shows the change in emission color. The right column shows switching unit light emission time Δtn/data transmission cycle Δts, and the right column shows Q data (RGB values) corresponding to each group (group 1, group 2,... ). It is expressed by a hexadecimal number, and the rightmost column shows the order of light emission. In this example, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 40 ms, and the data transmission cycle Δts is 10 ms (Δtn=40, Δts=10).

In the light emission order 01 to 03, white light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “F, F, F”. In the light emission order 04 to 09, red light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB value) of each group to “F, 0, 0”. For the light emission orders 10 to 15, orange light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “F, A, 0”.

For the light emission orders 16 to 21, yellow light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “F, F, 0”. For the light emission orders 22 to 27, green light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB value) of each group to “0, F, 0”. For the light emission orders 28 to 33, light blue light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “0, F, F”.

In the light emission order 34 to 39, blue light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB value) of each group to "0, 0, F". For the light emission orders 40 to 45, purple light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to "8, 0, 8".

The emission orders 01 to 45 can be configured as Q data for one cycle, for example. The time corresponding to this one cycle corresponds to the above-mentioned light emission control cycle. Here, the light emission control cycle is “1800 ms”. In other words, with 01 to 45 as one set, the LED 9 is controlled to emit light in the emission control cycle of 1800 ms in the emission color according to the emission sequence.

As described above, by controlling the light emission color to be emitted from the LED 9 in order of a plurality of colors in a short switching unit light emission time Δts, it is as if human beings visually emit rainbow colors. Can be seen.

FIG. 69 illustrates an example of gradation control data for realizing continuous emission of red light.
In this gradation control data, the leftmost column shows the continuous unit light emission time Δtm/data transmission cycle Δts, and the right column thereof shows Q data corresponding to each group (group 1, group 2,... ). (RGB values) are expressed in hexadecimal numbers, and the rightmost column shows the order of light emission. In this example, the continuous unit light emission time Δtm is 100 ms, and the data transmission period Δts is 10 ms (Δtm=100, Δts=10).

In the light emission order 01, red light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB value) of each group to “F, 0, 0”. The light emission of the light emission sequence 01 can be configured as Q data of the light emission control cycle, for example. Here, the light emission control period is “100 ms”. In other words, the emission color of 01 may be controlled to emit light at the emission control cycle of 100 ms.

FIG. 70 shows an example of gradation control data for realizing the blinking of red.
In this gradation control data, the leftmost column shows switching unit light emission time Δtn/data transmission cycle Δts, and the right column thereof shows Q data corresponding to each group (group 1, group 2,... ). (RGB values) are expressed in hexadecimal numbers, and the rightmost column shows the order of light emission. In this example, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 50 ms, and the data transmission cycle Δts is 10 ms (Δtn=50, Δts=10).

In the light emission sequence 01, red light emission is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “F, 0, 0”. In the light emission sequence 02, turning off is realized by setting the Q data (RGB values) of each group to “0, 0, 0”.

The light emission sequence 01, 02 can be configured as Q data of the light emission control cycle. Here, the light emission control period is “100 ms”. That is, one set of 01 and 02 may be controlled so that the LEDs 9 sequentially emit light in the emission color according to the emission order in the emission control cycle of 100 ms.

The period corresponding to the light emission control cycle (1800 ms in FIG. 68, 100 ms in FIGS. 69 and 70) described in the above gradation control data is the effect of the variation period (special symbol variation period) of the special symbol. It does not necessarily correspond to the period being executed (production period). That is, the light emission control cycle is a control cycle showing one cycle of a set of control data as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, and this is not related to the effect period.

Here, when performing the light emission effect by changing the plurality of colors described above (rainbow color light emission effect when the big hit is confirmed), the timing at which a period corresponding to an integral multiple of the light emission control cycle elapses is a change in the special symbol. There is no problem if it coincides with the ending timing, but if the timing is later than the timing when the change of the special symbol ends, the light emission by the LED 9 continues even after the change of the special symbol ends. , A problem arises.

As one of the methods for solving this, the effect control CPU 120 generates the light emission control data including the light emission stop command in the header (HD) at the timing when the change of the special symbol ends, and the light emitting body. It is possible to transmit to the driver 413 (serial-parallel conversion circuit).

In this case, in the serial-parallel change circuit, after receiving the light emission control data including the light emission stop command in the header (HD), the light emission control data transmitted from the production control CPU 120 is parallel to the serial signal in the decoder. Stop converting to a signal. As a result, data is not output to the LED 9, and as a result, the emission of the LED 9 is stopped.

As another method, after the variation of the special symbol is finished, the CPU 120 for effect control transmits blank data (for example, data in which all Q values are “0”) to the light emitter driver 413. Good.

In this case, the serial-parallel change circuit continuously executes conversion from the serial signal to the parallel signal, but since it is blank data, the LEDs 9 are all extinguished, and as a result, the emission of the LEDs 9 is stopped.

71 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the light emission effect process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the present embodiment.
First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a light emission effect execution condition that is a condition for executing the light emission effect is satisfied (A1). Specifically, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main board 11.

If it is determined that the condition is satisfied (A1; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a light emission pattern (A3). Specifically, based on the variation pattern designated by the received variation pattern command, the light emission effect distribution table 1212 is used to select and determine the light emission pattern from the light emission pattern table 1211 by the method described above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the light emission effect start timing (A5). Specifically, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation display of the effect pattern reaches a predetermined time that is predetermined as the time from the variation start to the reach state for the variation pattern, the light emission effect Determined as the start timing.

When it is determined that it is the light emission effect start timing (A5; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the data transmission timing (A7). The data transmission timing is a timing every time the time corresponding to the above-described data transmission cycle elapses.

When it is determined that it is the data transmission timing (A7; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of loop A for each electric component (LED 9) (A9 to A21).

In the process of loop A, the effect control CPU 120 executes a light emission control data generation process for generating light emission control data for the electric component (A11). Specifically, the light emission control data 1213 is referred to, and the light emission control generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern determined in A3 is read. Then, using the read emission control generation data, emission control data in a format (basic format or extended format) corresponding to the common format and format type shown in FIG. 8 is generated for the electric component.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a light emission control data transmission process of transmitting the light emission control data generated in A9 to each light emitter control board 16 (A13).

As shown in FIG. 4, the light emission control data transmitted from the effect control CPU 120 is a serial-parallel conversion circuit that first constitutes the light emitter driver 413b of the light emitter control board 16D via the effect control relay board 16A. Data input terminal (DATA/I). The input light emission control data is input from the data through terminal (DATA/O) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit to the data input terminal (DATA/I) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit that constitutes the light-emitter driver 413a of the light-emitter control board 16E. ) Is entered. The input light emission control data is input from the data through terminal (DATA/O) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit to the data input terminal (DATA/I) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit which constitutes the light-emitter driver 413c of the light-emitter control board 16F. ) Is entered.

In the serial-parallel conversion circuit which constitutes each of the light emitter drivers 413 (413a, 413b, 413c), the address information (AD1 to AD5 in 12 channels) included in the common format of the input light emission control data is input as the decode address. Whether or not it matches the address information set from the terminal (AD0 to AD5 for 12 channels) is determined, and only when they match, the input serial format clock signal and light emission control data become parallel format signals. To be converted. That is, only the light emission control data in which the address information included in the input light emission control data and the address information set from the decode address input terminals (AD0 to AD5 in the 12th channel) match are parallel in the corresponding light emitter driver 413. Since it is converted into a signal, the light emission control data for the light emitter driver 413 having a different address is directly passed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 increments the group number (group number) by "1" (A15). After that, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the above processing is completed for all the groups corresponding to the electric component (A17), and if it is determined that the processing is not completed (A17; No), A9. Return processing to. When it is determined that the process is completed (A17; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 resets the group number to "0" (A19). Then, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the processing to the next electric component (LED 9).

When the processing of the loop A for all the electric components (LED9) is executed (A21), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the light emission effect (A23). If it is determined that it is not the end timing (A23; No), the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to A7.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the light emission effect (A23; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to end the process (A25). If it is determined to continue the process (A25; No), the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to A1. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is to be ended (A25; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the light emission effect process.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a light emission effect using the LED 9. The effect control CPU 120 produces a light emission effect by a first pattern that causes the LED 9 to emit light in a specific color such as blue, green, or red, and a second pattern that causes the LED 9 to emit light in a plurality of colors (blue, green, red, or the like). It is feasible. The first pattern and the second pattern have different jackpot reliability and different light emission effect periods.
According to this, the first pattern and the second pattern have different jackpot reliabilities and different light emission effect periods, whereby the effect of light emission effect can be enhanced and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the light emission effect by a plurality of light emission patterns having different light emission modes (e.g., emission colors), and each of the plurality of light emission patterns specifies blue, green, red, or the like. This is a light emission mode including color light emission, and the plurality of light emission patterns have different jackpot reliability and different light emission unit time for a specific color.
According to this, it becomes possible to pay attention to the difference in the period in which the specific color is emitting light, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, an embodiment will be described in which a light emission pattern that causes the LED 9 to blink in a specific color is applied as the light emission pattern. In the present embodiment, the LED 9 is caused to emit light by a plurality of light emission patterns based on the light emission mode in which a specific color is blinked, the jackpot reliability is made different between the plurality of light emission patterns, and the light emission cycle of the specific color (hereinafter, referred to as “light emission”). It is a feature that the "cycle" is different.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a table configuration of the light emission pattern table 1211 in the third embodiment.
The table structure of the light emission pattern table 1211 is the same as that of the light emission pattern table 1211 described in FIG. 62, but the contents are different.

In this light emission pattern table, the light emission pattern for each category includes a light emission pattern of which the light emission type is "blinking" and a light emission color of "red". That is, a light emission pattern that causes the LED 9 to emit red flashing light is defined. In addition, a flashing red light emission pattern is set according to the jackpot reliability. The present embodiment is characterized in that the unit light emission time of this red blinking light emission pattern is changed according to the jackpot reliability.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of the light emission control generation data in this case.
The data structure of the light emission control generation data is the same as the light emission control generation data described in FIGS. 65 and 66, but the content of the data is different.

Specifically, the light emission control generation data shown in FIG. 73 is data having a data name “dat11-1-a”.
The format type is “basic”, and it is defined that the basic format of FIG. 8(2) is applied.
The address is “08”, and it is defined that the address is applied to the light emitter driver 413b corresponding to the left frame LED 9b.
The data transmission cycle is “10 ms”, and it is specified that the performance control board 12 transmits data to the light emitter driver 413b every 10 ms.
The unit light emission time is "100 ms", and it is defined that the left frame LED 9b emits light for a unit light emission time of 200 ms.
The light emission control cycle is "200 ms". The light emission type of the light emission pattern is “blinking”, and in order to perform blinking by turning on/off the red color, a time twice as long as the unit light emission time 10 ms is set as the light emission control cycle.

In the format data, the order of light emission is defined as "1" to "P". In the light emission order “1”, “F, 0, 0” is defined as Q data (RGB value) of each group, and in the light emission order “2”, Q data (RGB value) of each group is “0, 0, 0" is set, "F, 0, 0" is set as Q data (RGB value) of each group in the light emission order "3", and Q data of each group is set in the light emission order "4". “0, 0, 0” is defined as the (RGB value). The same applies hereinafter. As a result, the red light is turned on/off at each unit light emission time of 50 ms. As a result, red blinking is realized.

FIG. 74 is a timing chart showing an example of the light emission pattern in the present embodiment and the change over time of the RGB values corresponding to each light emission pattern.
FIG. 74(1) shows an example in which the LED 9 blinks in red as the light emission pattern E corresponding to the big hit reliability “low”. In this example, the R value is set to “F”, the G value and the B value are set to “0”, and the red light is turned off to set each of the RGB values to “0”. , Flashing red is realized.

FIG. 74(2) shows an example in which the LED 9 blinks in red as the light emission pattern F corresponding to the big hit reliability “medium”. In this example, the R value is set to “F”, the G value and the B value are set to “0”, and the red lighting is set to “0” for each of the RGB values. , Flashing red is realized. Here, the blinking unit light emission time Δto2 can be set to be shorter than the blinking unit light emission time Δto1 of FIG. 74(1) (Δto2<Δto1).

In FIG. 74(3), an example in which the LED 9 blinks in red corresponding to the jackpot reliability “high” is shown as the light emission pattern G. In this example, the R value is set to “F”, the G value and the B value are set to “0”, and the red lighting that sets each of the RGB values to “0” is switched by the blinking unit light emission time Δtо3. , Flashing red is realized. Here, the blinking unit light emission time Δto3 can be set to be shorter than the blinking unit light emission time Δtо2 of FIG. 74(2) (Δtо3<Δtо2).

In FIG. 74(4), as the light emission pattern H, the jackpot reliability “highest” is dealt with,
An example in which LEP 9 is made to emit light in a rainbow color is shown. In this example, each of the RGB values is changed in the order of “F”→“0”→“F”→“0”→... With the switching unit light emission time Δtn, and thereby the rainbow color is changed. Has realized light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn can be set to be shorter than the blinking unit light emission time Δtо3 of FIG. 74(3) (Δtn<Δtо3).

The light emission patterns E, F, and G described above are light emission patterns that cause the LED 9 to emit light in a light emission mode in which red is blinked, and these light emission patterns correspond to the first specific pattern. The light emission pattern H is a light emission pattern that causes the LED 9 to emit light in a light emission mode in which red is changed to another color among a plurality of colors (red, green, and blue), and this light emission pattern corresponds to a second specific pattern. To do.

The light emission patterns E, F, G (first specific pattern) and the light emission pattern H (second specific pattern) are controlled so that the jackpot reliability is different and the red light emission cycle is different. Specifically, the light emission pattern H with the highest jackpot reliability is controlled such that the red light emission cycle is the shortest.

Even in the same first specific pattern, that is, the light emission patterns E, F, and G, the jackpot reliability is different and the red light emission period is also different. Specifically, the light emission pattern G with the highest jackpot reliability is controlled so that the red light emission cycle, that is, the red blinking cycle is the shortest.

In the above example, since blinking and lighting of red are switched for each blinking unit light emission time Δtо, “2×Δto” which is twice the blinking unit light emission time Δto is the red light emission cycle.

Although red has been described as an example of the specific color that causes the LED 9 to blink, this may be another color such as blue or green. Further, the lighting and blinking times do not necessarily have to be the same, and one of the times may be set longer than the other.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 has one of a plurality of colors including a first specific pattern that causes the LED 9 to emit light in a light emission mode in which a specific color such as blue, green, and red is blinked, and a plurality of colors including the specific color. Can be performed by the second specific pattern that causes the LED 9 to emit light in a light emission mode that changes from one color to another color. The jackpot reliability is different between the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern, and the specific color The light emission cycle is different.
According to this, by making the jackpot reliability different between the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern and the light emission cycle of the specific color different, it becomes possible to focus on the difference in the light emission cycle of the specific color. , It is possible to enhance the effect of light emitting effect and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Regarding the light emission effect based on the light emission pattern described in the third embodiment, the principle of the light emission effect including the timing to start/end the light emission effect, the data configuration for realizing the light emission effect, and the control method are described in the second embodiment. A method similar to that of the form can be applied.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, an embodiment will be described in which, as the light emission pattern, a light emission pattern having a common color change mode including a specific color is applied. The present embodiment is characterized in that the LED 9 is caused to emit light by a common pattern having a common color change pattern, the jackpot reliability is made different, and the light emission cycle of a specific color is made different by a plurality of common patterns.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of the light emission control generation data in this case.
The data structure of the light emission control generation data is the same as the light emission control generation data described in FIGS. 65 and 66, but the content of the data is different.

Specifically, the light emission control generation data shown in FIG. 75 is data having a data name “dat21-1-a”.
The format type is “basic”, and it is defined that the basic format of FIG. 8(2) is applied.
The address is “08”, and it is defined that the address is applied to the light emitter driver 413b corresponding to the left frame LED 9b.
The data transmission cycle is “10 ms”, and it is specified that the performance control board 12 transmits data to the light emitter driver 413b every 10 ms.
The unit light emission time is "100 ms", and it is defined that the left frame LED 9b emits light for a unit light emission time of 200 ms.
The light emission control cycle is "200 ms". The light emission type of the light emission pattern is “switching”, and in order to perform light emission by switching (changing) between white and blue, a light emission control cycle is set to a time that is twice the unit light emission time of 100 ms.

In the format data, the order of light emission is defined as "1" to "P". In the light emission order “1”, “F, F, F” is defined as the Q data (RGB value) of each group, and in the light emission order “2”, the Q data (RGB value) of each group is “0, 0, F” is set, “F, F, F” is set as the Q data (RGB value) of each group in the light emission order “3”, and Q data of each group is set in the light emission order “4”. “0, 0, F” is defined as the (RGB value). The same applies hereinafter. As a result, white light emission and blue light emission are performed at each unit light emission time of 50 ms. As a result, white-blue light emission is realized.

FIG. 76 is a timing chart showing an example of the light emitting pattern in the present embodiment and the temporal change of the RGB values corresponding to each light emitting pattern.
FIG. 76(1) shows an example in which the LED 9 emits white and blue light as the light emission pattern S corresponding to the big hit reliability “low”. In this example, the first light emission (white) having R, G, and B values of “F” and the second light emission (blue) having B value of “F” and R and G values of “0”. ) And) are switched by the switching unit light emission time Δtn1 to realize white-blue switching light emission.

FIG. 76(2) shows an example in which the LED 9 emits white and blue light as the light emission pattern T corresponding to the big hit reliability “medium”. In this example, the first light emission (white) having R, G, and B values of “F” and the second light emission (blue) having B value of “F” and R and G values of “0”. ) And () are switched by the switching unit light emission time Δtn2, thereby realizing white-blue switching light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn2 can be set to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn1 of FIG. 76(1) (Δtn2<Δtn1).

FIG. 76(3) shows an example in which the LED 9 emits white and blue light as the light emission pattern U corresponding to the high hit reliability “high”. In this example, the first light emission (white) having R, G, and B values of “F” and the second light emission (blue) having B value of “F” and R and G values of “0”. ) And () are switched by the switching unit light emission time Δtn3, thereby realizing white-blue switching light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn3 can be set to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn2 of FIG. 76(2) (Δtn3<Δtn2).

FIG. 76(4) shows an example in which the LED 9 emits white and blue light as the light emission pattern V corresponding to the jackpot reliability “maximum”. In this example, the first light emission (white) having R, G, and B values of “F” and the second light emission (blue) having B value of “F” and R and G values of “0”. ) And () are switched by the switching unit light emission time Δtn4, thereby realizing white-blue switching light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn4 can be set to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn3 of FIG. 76(3) (Δtn4<Δtn3).

The light emission patterns S, T, U, and V described above realize a light emission pattern having a common color change mode by switching between white and blue light emission. Further, as the jackpot reliability is higher, the white and blue switching unit light emission times are controlled to be shorter. Further, since the light emission patterns S, T, U, and V are light emission patterns that change a plurality of colors, they correspond to the second pattern and also to a common pattern in which the manner of color change is common.

In the above description, white-blue switching light emission is described as an example, but white-green switching light emission and white-red switching light emission may be realized in the same manner.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the light emission effect according to the second pattern by a plurality of common patterns having a common color change mode, and the plurality of common patterns have different jackpot reliability and are common. The color emission cycle is different.
According to this, it is possible to pay attention to the difference in the light emission cycle of the common color by changing the light emission cycle of the common color in the plurality of common patterns and the different light emission cycles of the common color, thereby enhancing the effect of the light emission effect. , You can improve the enjoyment of the game.

Regarding the light emission effect by the light emission pattern described in the fourth embodiment, the principle of the light emission effect including the timing to start/end the light emission effect, the data configuration for realizing the light emission effect, and the control method are described in the second embodiment. A method similar to that of the form can be applied.

[5. Other Embodiments]
The embodiments to which the present invention can be applied are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be appropriately modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described. It should be noted that the same components as those in the above-described respective embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

[5-1. Amusement machine]
In the above embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention has been described as the pachinko gaming machine 1, but a slot machine that allows a player to play a game using a gaming medal is referred to as the gaming machine according to the present invention. You may make it perform the light emission effect similar to embodiment.

[5-2. Light emitting part]
In the above embodiment, the light emitting unit according to the present invention has been described as three types of the left frame LED 9b, the top frame LED 9a, and the right frame LED 9c. However, of course, for example, the board-side LEDs 9d and 9e may be used as the light emitting unit according to the present invention.

In addition, for example, a movable member for presentation (production accessory) is configured to be operated by driving a solenoid, and an LED is formed on the production accessory to use the accessory LED as a light emitting unit according to the present invention. Good.

In addition, for example, a light guide plate such as an LED light guide plate configured as an acrylic plate that irradiates LED light from the side surface of a laser-processed acrylic plate and causes surface emission by a special pulse mark, or displays with a 7-segment display method. It is possible to configure the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a light emitting unit such as a segment display device capable of displaying, a dot display device capable of displaying in a dot display system, etc., and using these light emitting units as the light emitting unit according to the present invention, You may make it perform light emission production.

[5-3. Light emission pattern]
In the above-described embodiment, the first pattern has been described as an example of the light emitting pattern in which the specific color is a single color and the light emitting unit emits light. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitting portion may be caused to emit light by using a light emitting pattern that continuously emits light with a mixed color (a color obtained by mixing RGB at a predetermined ratio) as a specific color.

Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, as the first specific pattern, the light emission pattern that causes the LED 9 to emit light in the light emission mode in which the specific color is blinked as a single color is described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light-emitting pattern may be made to emit light with the light-emitting pattern that blinks a mixed color (a color obtained by mixing RGB at a predetermined ratio) as the specific color as the first specific pattern.

Further, the following light emitting pattern may be set as the light emitting pattern.

FIG. 77 is a timing chart showing an example of a light emitting pattern and temporal changes in RGB values corresponding to each light emitting pattern in another embodiment.

FIG. 77(1) shows an example in which the LED 9 emits white and blue light as the light emission pattern W corresponding to the big hit reliability “low”. In this example, the first light emission (white) having R, G, and B values of “F” and the second light emission (blue) having B value of “F” and R and G values of “0”. ) And () are switched by the switching unit light emission time Δtn5, so that white-blue switching light emission is realized.

FIG. 77(2) shows an example in which the LED 9 emits white and green light as the light emission pattern X corresponding to the big hit reliability “medium”. In this example, the first light emission (white) having R, G, and B values of “F” and the second light emission (green) having G of “F” and R and B values of “0”. ) And () are switched by the switching unit light emission time Δtn6, thereby realizing white-green switching light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn6 can be set to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn5 of FIG. 77(1) (Δtn6<Δtn5).

FIG. 77(3) shows an example in which the LED 9 emits white and red light as the light emission pattern Y corresponding to the big hit reliability “high”. In this example, the first light emission (white) having R, G, and B values of “F” and the second light emission (red) having R value of “F” and G and B values of “0”. ) And () are switched by the switching unit light emission time Δtn7, thereby realizing white and red switching light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn7 can be set to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn6 of FIG. 77(2) (Δtn7<Δtn6).

FIG. 77(4) shows an example in which the LED 9 emits rainbow colors corresponding to the jackpot reliability “highest” as the light emission pattern Z. In this example, each of the RGB values is changed in the order of “F”→“0”→“F”→“0”→... With the switching unit light emission time Δtn8, and thereby the rainbow color is changed. Has realized light emission. Here, the switching unit light emission time Δtn8 can be set to be shorter than the switching unit light emission time Δtn7 of FIG. 77(3) (Δtn8<Δtn7).

[5-4. Light emission control]
In the above embodiment, the light emission of the LED 9 is controlled based on the RGB value expressed in hexadecimal notation, but this is merely an example, and for example, decimal notation (256 gradations: 0 to 255). The light emission of the LED 9 may be controlled on the basis of the RGB values represented by.

Further, for example, the light emission control data is configured by modeling based on the HSV (hue, saturation, lightness) color space, and the light emission control data is used to cause the LED 9 to emit light to realize a light emission effect. Good.

Further, a light emitting area as a light emitting unit is configured for each light emitting element for which RGB is set or for each of a plurality of light emitting elements for which RGB is set, and each light emitting area is made to emit light in a different light emitting color. You may For example, it is possible to realize a rainbow-colored light emission by forming a light emitting area including a plurality of light emitting elements and causing each light emitting area to emit light in a different color to form a gradation.

[5-5. Luminous production time]
In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the light emission effect time is set for each light emission pattern according to the variation pattern of the special symbol. However, instead of doing so, the effect control CPU 120 determines the light emission effect time each time according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 11, and makes the determination. You may make it control the light emission of LED9 by the light emission production time.

[5-6. Specific color]
In the above embodiment, the specific color was described as a single color such as blue, green, and red, but the specific color is not limited to these, and a mixed color generated by mixing these single colors is a specific color according to the present invention. Good.

Further, in general, when referring to “monochromatic”, it means a single color without any mixing. In this case, in terms of RGB, it is conceivable that only one component has a value and other components do not have a value (0), which is defined as a single color. However, the color that the player visually recognizes as a single color, that is, the color that the player visually recognizes as a single color, may be treated as a single color to control the light emission.

Specifically, for example, in the case of "blue", for example, even in the case of 256 gradations, the B value is "255", and the R value and the G value are minute values of about "1 to 9", It is considered that the player visually recognizes as "blue". The same applies to "green" and "red". Therefore, for example, among the RGB values, the value of the component corresponding to the color that is the main element of a single color is set to the maximum value, and the other two components are set to minute values. You may do it. That is, even if the colors are actually mixed, the color visually recognized as a single color by the player may be regarded as a single color and the present invention may be applied.

Further, the LED 9 may be made to emit light so that the player can visually recognize it as a specific color, and what kind of light emission control method is applied to make the LED 9 emit light is a design matter, and the above-mentioned embodiment is used. The control method using the serial-parallel conversion circuit described in 1. is not limited.

[5-7. Hold display related]
In the above-described embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control has a display mode (display color, lighting/flashing, etc.) of the hold display displayed on the hold display 25 (the first hold display 25A or the second hold display 25B). You may make it perform the light emission production which makes LED9 light-emit with the corresponding light emission pattern.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the pending display notice effect determination process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in this case.
First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a start winning determination result designation command has been received from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15 (B1).

On the side of the game control microcomputer 100, a display result (whether it is a big hit or not) and a prize time determination (pre-reading determination) of the variation pattern type are performed at the time of a start winning, and a command (display result designation command, (Variation pattern type designation command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as a start winning award determination result command.

Here, the variation pattern types include variation pattern types such as “non-reach out”, “normal reach out”, “super reach out”, “normal reach jackpot”, and “super reach jackpot”. In B1, it is determined whether or not the start winning determination result command is received from the main board 11.

When it is determined that it has been received (B1; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display from the prefetch mode determination table 1219 stored in the ROM 121 based on the received start winning determination result specification command. Determine (B3). The effect control CPU 120 controls the hold indicator 25 to perform the hold display in the display mode determined in B3.

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the light emission mode of the LED 9 based on the display mode of the hold display determined in B3 (B5). The effect control CPU 120 controls each LED 9 to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the determined light emission mode. Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the hold display notice effect determination process.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of the table configuration of the prefetch mode determination table 1219.
In the look-ahead mode determination table, for example, the variation pattern type and the pending display are defined in association with each other.

As the variation pattern type, the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol is defined.
In the hold display, a display mode of the hold display, such as “lighting” and “blinking”, a display mode of the hold display such as normal color, blue, green, and red, or a combination thereof is determined. .. Further, in the hold display, a selection ratio for selecting the display mode of the hold display is set.

This will be specifically described.
In the look-ahead manner determination table 1219 shown in FIG. 79, “non-reach out”, “normal reach out”, “super reach out”, “normal reach out”, and “super reach out” are defined as the variation pattern types. Further, in the hold display, “normal lighting”, “blue lighting”, “red lighting”, and “red flashing” are defined as display modes of the hold display.

For the fluctuation pattern type “non-reach out”, the selection ratio is “75%” for “normal lighting”, “25%” for “blue lighting”, “red lighting” and “flashing red” as the selection ratios on the hold display. 0%" is set for each.

For the fluctuation pattern type “out of normal reach”, the reserved display shows selection ratios of “60%” for “normal lighting”, “20%” for “blue lighting”, “15%” for “red lighting”, and “red”. Blinking" is set to "5%".

For the fluctuation pattern type “out of super reach”, in the hold display, as selection ratios, “normal lighting” is “20%”, “blue lighting” is “25%”, “red lighting” is “25%”, "Blinking red" is set to "30%".

For the variation pattern type “normal reach jackpot”, the reserved display has selection ratios of “10%” for “normal lighting”, “20%” for “blue lighting”, “30%” for “red lighting”, and “red”. "40%" is defined for "blink".

For the variation pattern type “Super reach jackpot”, the selection ratios on the hold display are “2%” for “normal lighting”, “8%” for “blue lighting”, and “40%” for “red lighting”. "50%" is defined for each "blinking red".

The effect control CPU 120 selects/determines one display mode of the hold display according to the above selection ratio according to the variation pattern type. In this case, when the "normal lighting" is determined, the white lighting is held and displayed, and the LED 9 is caused to emit light in the white lighting pattern corresponding to the white lighting.

When "blue lighting" is determined, the blue lighting is held and displayed, and the LED 9 is caused to emit light in the blue lighting pattern corresponding to the blue lighting. When "red lighting" is determined, the red lighting is held and displayed, and the LED 9 is caused to emit light in the red lighting pattern corresponding to the red lighting. When "red blinking" is determined, the red blinking hold display is performed, and the LED 9 is caused to emit light in the red blinking light emission pattern corresponding to the red blinking.

In this way, by performing the light emission effect in accordance with the light emission pattern corresponding to the display mode of the hold display (specific display) corresponding to the variable display, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Here, the specific display corresponding to the variable display is the hold display as the display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended, but the active display as the display corresponding to the variable display in execution is set as the specific display. The light emission effect may be executed by a light emission pattern corresponding to the display mode of the specific display. That is, the specific display according to the present invention can be a variable display corresponding display including a hold display and an active display.

[5-8. Light emission effect start/end timing]
The light emission effect start timing and the light emission effect end timing described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the design can be appropriately changed.

FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining another principle of the light emission effect.
FIG. 80(1) shows a first example of the light emission effect.
This figure shows a timing chart showing an example of control of light emission effect in a specific super reach effect, and shows an example of control of light emission effect in the battle reach effect.

When the battle reach effect is executed, from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) to the occurrence of the reach state, the effect symbol in the effect mode of the normal variable display as shown in FIG. 72(A). Is displayed on the effect display device 5.

In the effect display device 5, when the reach state occurs at the time “tm1”, as shown in FIGS. 51B and 51C, the message image 53 is displayed and the battle effect corresponding to the battle reach effect is displayed. The moving image of is displayed. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 starts the execution of the light emission effect in response to the occurrence of the reach state. That is, the start period (start timing) of the light emission effect is the timing (time “tm1”) at which the reach state occurs.

FIG. 80(A) shows an example in which the jackpot reliability is lower than those in FIGS. 80(B) and (C), and the variation display result is “miss”.
In this example, the case where the execution of the light emission effect is ended at the time “ts1” at which the first half of the battle reach effect is ended is shown. That is, the light emission effect end timing is time “ts1”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “ts1”. Further, in this case, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LED 9 to emit light of the emission color A. The luminescent color A in this case may be a luminescent color that is a single color and that indicates that the jackpot reliability is low (for example, white or blue).

FIG. 80(B) shows an example in which the jackpot reliability is higher than that in FIG. 80(A), but is lower than that in FIG. 80(C), and the variation display result is “miss”. There is.
In this example, the time "tm1" when the reach state occurs is used as the light emission effect start timing, and an example of the light emission effect including the first effect stage and the subsequent second effect stage is shown. In this example, the first effect stage ends at the time "ts1" at which the first half of the battle reach finishes, and the second effect stage ends at the time "ts2" at which the latter half of the reach reach that is developed progressively ends. To do. That is, for the entire light emission effect, the light emission effect start timing is time “tm1”, the light emission effect end timing is time “ts2”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “ts2”.

Further, in the first effect stage, the effect start timing is time “tm1” and the effect end timing is “ts1”, and the effect period of the first effect stage is a period from time “tm1” to “ts1”. .. Further, in the second effect stage, the effect start timing is "ts1" and the effect end timing is "ts2", and the effect period of the second effect stage is a period from time "ts1" to "ts2".

Here, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LED 9 to emit light with the emission color A in the first effect stage, and controls the LED 9 to emit light with the emission color B in the second effect stage. In this case, the luminescent color A may be a luminescent color that is a single luminescent color and that indicates that the jackpot reliability is low (for example, white or blue), and the luminescent color B is a single luminescent color. The emission color (for example, green) indicating that the jackpot reliability is medium may be used.

FIG. 80(C) shows an example in which the jackpot reliability is the highest and the variation display result is “jack”.
In this example, the time "tm1" when the reach state occurs is used as the light emission effect start timing, and an example of the light emission effect including the first effect stage and the subsequent second effect stage is shown. In this example, at the time "ts1" at which the first half of the battle reach production ends, the first production stage ends, and after that, the reach result production and the stop symbol production are executed through the latter half of the production reach that is developed and finally executed. The second effect stage ends at time "ts3" at which the variable display ends. That is, for the entire light emission effect, the light emission effect start timing is time “tm1”, the light emission effect end timing is time “ts3”, and the light emission effect period is a period from time “tm1” to “ts3”.

Further, in the first effect stage, the effect start timing is time “tm1”, the effect end timing is “ts1”, and the effect period of the first effect stage is the period from time “tm1” to “ts1”. Further, in the second effect stage, the effect start timing is “ts1” and the effect end timing is “ts3”, and the effect period of the second effect stage is a period from time “ts1” to “ts3”.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 controls the LED 9 to emit light with the emission color C in the first effect stage, and controls the LED 9 to emit light with the special emission color in the second effect stage. In this case, the luminescent color C may be a luminescent color of a single color and may be a luminescent color indicating that the jackpot reliability is high (for example, red), and the special luminescent color indicates that the jackpot reliability is the highest. The emission color (for example, rainbow color) may be used.

Further, in the above example, after the second effect stage, the light emission effect of causing the LED 9 to emit light in the special light emission color may be executed. For example, in the first production stage, the LED 9 is made to emit light in the emission color A or the like (first specific color), and in the subsequent second production stage, the LED 9 is made to emit light in the emission colors B, C or the like (second specific color). May be emitted, and after the end of the period corresponding to the second effect stage, the light emission effect of causing the LED 9 to emit light in the special emission color may be executed. In addition, the light emission pattern illustrated in the third embodiment (a light emission pattern that blinks in a specific color) and the light emission pattern illustrated in the fourth embodiment (a light emission pattern in which a color change mode including a specific color is common) are applied. May be. For example, in the first effect stage, the LED 9 is caused to emit light in the light emission mode in which the emission color A or the like (first specific color) is blinked, and in the subsequent second effect stage, the emission colors B, C or the like (second specification color). The LED 9 may be caused to emit light in a light emission mode in which (color) is blinked, and after the end of the period corresponding to the second effect stage, a light emission effect of causing the LED 9 to emit light with a special emission color may be executed. The combination of the emission color and the emission mode can be any combination.
In this way, by executing a plurality of stages of light emission effects having different colors and modes for causing the light emitting unit to emit light, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the enjoyment of the game. Also, after the period corresponding to the first effect stage or the second effect stage ends, by executing the light emission effect by the light emission pattern that causes the LED 9 to emit the special light emission color, the player can have a special expectation. it can.

Further, in the above embodiment, the timing at which the reach state is generated is set as the light emission effect start timing, but this is merely an example, and a specific timing after the reach state is generated may be set as the light emission effect start timing. For example, the timing at which a fixed time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the reach state has occurred may be used as the emission effect start timing.

Further, in each of the light emission patterns shown in FIGS. 61 and 80, the light emission effect start timing (time “tm1”) is shown and described as common timing, but the light emission effect start timing is not necessarily set for all light emission patterns. It does not have to be common.

Specifically, the light emission effect start timing may be changed according to the variation pattern or the variation pattern type, or the light emission effect start timing may be changed according to the type of effect to be performed or the type of reach. May be.

In this case, the light emission effect start timing may be set such that the light emission effect is started at a timing later in time as the jackpot reliability becomes higher. Conversely, the light emission effect start timing may be set such that the light emission effect is started at a timing earlier in time when the jackpot reliability is higher as a result.

Also, the light emission effect end timing (time “tn” in FIG. 61, “ts” in FIG. 80) is merely an example shown in the above embodiment, and it is needless to say that it can be appropriately changed. .. Whether the light emission effect start timing is common or different as described above, the light emission effect ends at a later timing as the jackpot reliability increases as a result. It is preferable to set the light emission effect end timing and the light emission effect time in advance.

[5-9. Luminescent effect based on player's action]
During the execution of the reach effect in the above embodiment, the light emission effect may be executed based on a predetermined operation of the player.

Specifically, for example, when the push button 31B is pressed by the player after the reach effect is executed and the push sensor 35B detects that the push button 31B is pressed, a detection signal is output from the push sensor 35B. Alternatively, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12 may start the execution of the light emission effect.

Further, in this case, the number of pushes of the push button 31B by the player, that is, the number of times the push sensor 35 detects the push of the push button 31B and the detection signal is output is internally counted, and the number of pushes is May be changed every time the number of times reaches a specified number (for example, blue→green→red→rainbow).

In addition to the above, for example, when the player tilts the stick controller 31A, the controller sensor unit 35B detects the tilt operation of the stick controller 31A, and the detection signal is output, the effect control is performed. The CPU 120 may execute the light emission effect.

Further, in this case, the color of light emitted from the LED 9 may be changed according to the tilt angle of the stick controller 31A. In this case, the emission color is set for each numerical range corresponding to the tilt angle of the stick controller 31A, and the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the numerical range including the tilt angle detected by the controller sensor unit 35B. The LED 9 may be made to emit light based on the emission color.

Further, since the stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button at a predetermined position of the operation stick held by the player, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the light emission effect when the pressing operation of the trigger button is detected. You may do so.

In addition, the button operation and the stick operation in the above-mentioned case, for example, as a hidden element (hidden operation: hidden button) related to the execution of the light-emission effect, do not give a notification prompting the execution of the operation, thereby making the game entertaining. Can be improved.

However, it does not necessarily have to be a hidden element, and the player can perform the button operation or the stick operation by displaying a message or an effect image that prompts the button operation or the stick operation on the effect display device 5. Good.

As described above, by executing the light emission effect based on the predetermined operation of the player during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the gaming enjoyment.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the speaker 8 to output a predetermined sound effect during the execution of the light emission effect in response to the button operation or the stick operation by the player.

Specifically, for example, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 8 every time the number of times the button is pressed reaches a prescribed number (for example, 10 times) or the tilt angle of the stick reaches a prescribed angle. Good.

In this case, the specific color in the continuous light emission is changed (for example, blue→green→red→rainbow color) or the specific color in the blinking light is turned on/off according to the number of times the button is pressed and the tilt angle of the stick. For example, blue lighting→blue unlit) may be changed, or a specific color in switching light emission may be changed (for example, white→blue, blue→white).

[5-10. Light emission for each light emission site]
In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured with a light emitting unit configured of a plurality of light emitting units, and a light emitting effect may be executed in which the plurality of light emitting units emit light in different colors.

Specifically, for example, a hat-shaped, stick-shaped, arched, or other light-emitting portion is configured as a light-emitting body including a plurality of light-emitting portions such as LEDs, and the LEDs of the plurality of light-emitting portions are gradations. It may be changed to realize the light emission effect by the iridescent light emission pattern described in the above embodiment.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of a temporal change in color of the light emitting portion in this case. Here, an example is illustrated in which a light-emitting body is realized by controlling a light-emitting body composed of three light-emitting portions including a first light-emitting portion, a second light-emitting portion, and a third light-emitting portion.

For example, the light emission color of the first light emitting portion is changed in order such as “white→red→orange→yellow→green→light blue→blue→purple→white→... ”. In this case, the color of light emitted from the first light emitting portion is used as a reference, and the color of light emitted from the second light emitting portion is shifted by one, for example, "red→orange→yellow→green→light blue→blue→purple→white→red→ .." in the order of, for example, by shifting the colors by two, the emission color of the third light emitting portion is in the order of "orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple → white → red → orange →..." Change with.

In this way, by performing the light emission effect with the special pattern in which the plurality of light emitting portions that configure the light emitting portion emit light in different colors, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emission effect and improve the enjoyment of the game.

[5-11. Look-ahead notice production]
The effect control CPU 120 may execute the look-ahead notice effect, and may execute the light-emission effect in response to the execution of the look-ahead notice effect.

Specifically, a pre-reading notice determination table prepared in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the presence or absence of the pre-reading notice production and the pre-reading notice pattern. The look-ahead notice determination table is compared with a random number value for determining the look-ahead notice type in accordance with the designated content of the variation category command transmitted from the main board 11 based on the start winning corresponding to the variation display subject to the notice. The numerical value (determined value) may be assigned to the determination result of “no execution” corresponding to the case where the prefetching notice effect is not executed, a plurality of prefetching notice patterns when executing the prefetching notice effect, and the like.

In this case, for example, a plurality of light emission patterns are set in association with the look-ahead notice pattern as in the above embodiment. Then, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the pre-reading notice determination table on the basis of the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the pre-reading notice that is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the like, and determines the presence or absence of the pre-reading notice production and the pre-reading notice pattern. decide. Then, the light emission pattern corresponding to the determined look-ahead notice pattern may be selected to execute the light emission effect described in the above embodiment.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 5 Performance display device 100 Game control microcomputer 102 RAM
120 CPU for production control
321 Movable member

Claims (2)

A gaming machine having a light emitting unit,
A game state control means capable of controlling an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
And a production control means capable of controlling production,
The effect control means,
A light emitting effect using the light emitting unit,
It is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the light emission effect can be executed by one of the effect patterns of the first pattern that causes the light emitting unit to emit light in a specific color and the second pattern that causes the light emitting unit to emit light in a plurality of colors. Yes,
When the emission effect by the first pattern has been performed, when the emission of a specific color continues for a predetermined period is controlled by the advantageous condition than when the light emission in a particular color not continued the predetermined period The percentage is high,
The specific color includes a first specific color and a second specific color,
The ratio of the light emission of the second specific color continuing for the predetermined period is higher than the ratio of the light emission of the first specific color continuing for the predetermined period,
When the light emission effect is executed by the second pattern, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the light emission effect is executed by the first pattern,
A period in which the light emission in the plurality of colors continues when the light emission effect is performed in the second pattern is shorter than a period in which the light emission in the specific color continues when the light emission effect is performed in the first pattern. A gaming machine characterized by being long . The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A control unit for controlling an electric component including the light emitting unit;
Output means capable of outputting a specific signal for driving the electric component in response to the input of the control signal by the serial communication method from the control means, and outputting the control signal to another output means; Equipped with
The output means outputs the control signal to the other output means in a first output state in which a waveform rises according to a predetermined mode, and a waveform rises in a change mode gentler than the first output state. A gaming machine, which can be set to any one of the second output state.

Images